CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version

Contents
1 - TeSys motor starters:

open version
b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4
Combination automatic motor starters

b D.O.L starters, type 1 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6
1
b D.O.L starters, type 2 coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10
Combination starters for customer assembly

b D.O.L starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into
the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate
thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22
b Star-delta starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into
the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate
thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/28
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30
v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control
b 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34
Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37
b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock,for customer assembly . . . page 1/41
1
b 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45

b 90 to 375 kW, on chassis for customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47
TeSys U starter-controllers
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52

b Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/58
b Non-reversing and reversing power bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/62
1
b Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64

b Control units and function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/68
b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/72

b Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . page 1/76
b AS-Interface communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/78
1
b 3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80
b CANopen communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84

b DeviceNet communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86
b Advantys STB communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/90
b Modbus communication modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/92
b Communication gateways LUF P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/94
10
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96

b Tripping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/104
1/0
0
b Selection curves according to categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/108

b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/110
b Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/112
b TeSys U starter-controllers, variable speed controllers

and soft start/soft stop units
v Altistart U01 and TeSys U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/124
v Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers
and soft start/soft stop units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/134
b Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/138
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor

breakers
b General, terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/140
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/150
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/160
b Accessories and coils references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/165
b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/174
Adaptators for use with busbar systems

b With 40 mm and 60 mm pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/178
7H6\V4XLFNWLQVWDOODWLRQV\VWHPIRUPRWRUVWDUWHU
components
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/190
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/192
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200
b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/202
AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/207
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/208

b Mounting (equipment possibilities). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/210
b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/214
10
1/1
1
General
TeSys motor starters

Levels of service
Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

7KHVWDQGDUGGHQHVWHVWVDWGLIIHUHQWOHYHOVRIFXUUHQWWKHSXUSRVHRIWKHVHWHVWVLV
to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
7KHVWDQGDUGGHQHVW\SHVRIFRRUGLQDWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQGLWLRQRIWKH
components after testing:
type 1,
type 2.
To determine the type of coordination, the standard requires that the behaviour of the
equipment be tested under overload and short-circuit conditions for 3 fault current
values, covering overload and short-circuit conditions.
Type 1 coordination
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
Type 2 coordination
Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently
EHDEOHWRUHVXPHRSHUDWLRQ7KHULVNRIFRQWDFWZHOGLQJLVSHUPLVVLEOHLQWKLVFDVH
the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the
equipment.
Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.

t
Current values
Overload zone
Low-level
short-circuit zone
Short-circuit zone
5
1
6WDQGDUG,(&VSHFLHVWKHFXUUHQWYDOXHVWREHXVHGIRUFKHFNLQJ
coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection
device:
b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip,
b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate.
2
4
5
Current r (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In)

The main cause of this type of fault is the deterioration of insulating materials.
6WDQGDUG,(&GHQHVDQLQWHUPHGLDWHVKRUWFLUFXLWFXUUHQWU7KLVWHVW
current makes it possible to check whether the protection device is providing
protection against low-level short-circuits.
3
1
In
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Current Ico (overload I < 10 In)

The thermal overload relay associated with the contactor provides protection against
WKLVW\SHRIIDXOWXSWRDYDOXH,FRVHHFXUYHGHQHGE\WKHPDQXIDFWXUHU
6
10
0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico

Ico
Ir
50
Iq
Thermal overload relay curve.

Fuse.
Tripping of thermal overload relay only.
Thermal limit of the circuit-breaker.
Thermal overload relay limit.
Current broken by the SCPD (1).
Circuit breaker magnetic trip.
Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A)

Ie y 16
16 < Ie y63
63 < Ie y125
125 < Ie y 315
315 < Ie y 630
630 < Ie y 1000
Current r (kA)
1
3
5
10
18
30
Current Iq (short-circuit > current r)

This type of fault corresponds to a dead short and is relatively rare. It can be caused
by a connection error during maintenance work. Short-circuit protection is provided
by fast operating devices.
6WDQGDUG,(&GHQHVDFXUUHQW,T7KHFRRUGLQDWLRQWDEOHVVXSSOLHGE\
6FKQHLGHU(OHFWULFDUHEDVHGRQDFXUUHQW,TWKDWLVJHQHUDOO\u 50 kA.
(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.
10
1/2
General (continued)
TeSys motor starters

Levels of service
Selection
No coordination
Type 1 coordination
Considerable risks to both persons and

equipment.
Not authorised by standards:

v NF C 15-100 and IEC 60364-1, article 133-1
(installation regulations),
v EN/IEC 60204-1, article 7
(electrical equipment in machines),
v IEC 60947-4-1, article 8.2.5. (starters)
The most frequently used solution.

b Equipment costs are lower.
b Reliability of operation is not a requirement.
b Before restarting, it may be necessary to repair the
motor starter.
Consequences:
v VLJQLFDQWDPRXQWRIPDFKLQHGRZQWLPH
v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair,
check, obtain supplies.
Example: air conditioning in commercial premises.
Type 2 coordination
This solution ensures reliability of operation.

Consequences:
v reduced machine downtime,
v reduced maintenance after a short-circuit.
Example: escalators.
Total coordination
With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is

permissible and reliability of operation is
guaranteed.
Consequences:
v immediate return to service,
v no special precautions required.
([DPSOHVVPRNHH[WUDFWLRQUHJKWLQJSXPSV
10
1/3
Selection guide
Applications
TeSys motor starters - open version
Pre-assembled starters
Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters
Starter type
D.O.L. or reversing starters with circuit-breaker
Level of service
Type 1 coordination
Power at 400 V
Up to 5.5 kW
Type of components
Pages
Machines starting
under no-load:
star-delta starters
D.O.L. starters with

fuse protection
Soft start units or

star-delta starters to
be used in association
with a circuit-breaker or
fuses
Up to 37 kW
Up to 132 kW
Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection

built into the circuit-breaker
Fuse carrier
+ plate-mounted
contactor
3 contactors
(line, star and delta,
mounted on plate,
rail or chassis)
1/6 and 1/7
1/34
1/37
10
1/4
Type 2 coordination
Up to 37 kW
1/8 and 1/9
1/10 and 1/11
Starters for customer assembly
Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
D.O.L. or reversing starters D.O.L., reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers
D.O.L., reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses
Total coordination
Type 1 and type 2 coordination
Up to 15 kW
Up to 110 kW
Up to 315 kW
Starter-controller
Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
Magnetic circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
+ thermal overload relay
Fuse carrier
+ contactor(s)
Switch-disconnector-fuse
+ contactor(s)
1/62 and 1/63
1/16 and 1/17, 1/26

and 1/27
1/18 and 1/19,

1/28 and 1/29
1/22
1/31
1/23, 1/31
1/32 and 1/33
Up to 355 kW
10
1/5
References

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME,
b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 K,
b 1 combination block GV2 AF01.
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
GV2
400/415 V
kA
ME06K1
50
ME07K1
50
ME08K1
50
ME10K1
50
ME14K1
50
ME16K1
15
440 V
kA
50
50
50
50
15
500 V
kA
50
50
50
50
10 (4 kW)
6 (5.5 kW)
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
GV2 ME10K1pp
For customer assembly
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Weight
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
0.75
A
11.6
A
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC1 K06
GV2 ME06K1pp
kg
0.460
0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC1 K06
GV2 ME07K1pp
0.460
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC1 K06
GV2 ME08K1pp
0.460
2.2
2.2
3
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC1 K06
GV2 ME10K1pp
0.460
3
4
4
5.5
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC1 K09
GV2 ME14K1pp
0.460
5.5
5.5
7.5
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC1 K12
GV2 ME16K1pp
0.460
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
10
GV2 AF01
Add-on blocks
Description
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor
Weight
kg
0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11
3OHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Volts
24
110
220/230
230
230/240
a 50/60 Hz
B7
F7
M7
P7
U7
c (4)
BW3
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
1/6
Schemes :
page 1/14
380/400
Q7
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 K,
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
GV2
400/415 V
kA
ME06K2
50
ME07K2
50
ME08K2
50
ME10K2
50
ME14K2
50
ME16K2
15
440 V
kA
50
50
50
50
15
500 V
kA
50
50
50
50
10/4 kW
6/5.5 kW
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing

of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
GV2 ME10K2pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Weight
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
kW
0.37
0.55
0.75
A
11.6
A
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC2 K06
GV2 ME06K2pp
kg
0.460
0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC2 K06
GV2 ME07K2pp
0.460
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC2 K06
GV2 ME08K2pp
0.460
2.2
2.2
3
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC2 K06
GV2 ME10K2pp
0.460
3
4
4
5.5
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC2 K09
GV2 ME14K2pp
0.460
5.5
5.5
7.5
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC2 K12
GV2 ME16K2pp
0.460
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
10
GV2 AF01
Add-on blocks
Description
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor
Weight
kg
0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
Volts
24
110
220/230
230
230/240
a 50/60 Hz
B7
F7
M7
P7
U7
c (4)
BW3
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.71.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
380/400
Q7
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
Schemes :
page 1/14
1/7
References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D,
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
440 V
500 V
kA
kA
kA
DM 102 to
DM 110
DM 114
DM 116
DM 120
DM 121
DM 122
DM 132
50
50
50
50
15
6
15
8
6
15
8
6
15
6
4
15
6
4
10
6
4
References
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
kW
A
0.160.25
0.250.40
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
18.5
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(2)
A
2.4
5
GV2 ME02
GV2 ME03
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM102pp (3)

GV2 DM103pp (3)
kg
0.596
0.596
0.400.63
GV2 ME04
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM104pp (3)
0.596
0.631
13
GV2 ME05
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM105pp (3)
0.596
11.6
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM106pp (3)
0.596
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM107pp (3)
0.596
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM108pp (3)
0.596
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM110pp (3)
0.596
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DM114pp (3)
0.596
914
1318
170
223
GV2 ME16
GV2 ME20
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D18pp
GV2 DM116pp
GV2 DM120pp
0.601
0.606
1723
2025
2432
327
327
416
GV2 ME21
GV2 ME22
GV2 ME32
LC1 D25pp
LC1 D25pp
LC1 D32pp
GV2 DM121pp
GV2 DM122pp
GV2 DM132pp
0.646
0.646
0.651
GV2 DM102pp
kW
0.06
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
kW
0.06
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
11
15
Weight
Add-on blocks
Description
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (4)
BD
(3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17

(4) Only available for GV2 DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
1/8
Schemes :
page 1/14
References

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D,
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
kA
DM202 to
DM210
50
DM214
DM216
DM220
DM221
DM222
DM232
50
15
15
15
15
10
440 V
kA
50
15
500 V
kA
50
10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing (2)
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
GV2 DM202pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed (3)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code (4)
Weight
kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
A
0.160.25
A
2.4
GV2 ME02
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM202pp
kg
0.963
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
0.250.40
GV2 ME03
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM203pp
0.963
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
0.400.63
GV2 ME04
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM204pp
0.963
0.631
13
GV2 ME05
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM205pp
0.963
11.6
22.5
GV2 ME06
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM206pp
0.963
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 ME07
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM207pp
0.963
2.54
51
GV2 ME08
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM208pp
0.963
46.3
78
GV2 ME10
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM210pp
0.963
610
138
GV2 ME14
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DM214pp
0.963
914
170
GV2 ME16
LC2 D12pp
GV2 DM216pp
0.973
7.5
7.5
9
11
9
11
1318
223
GV2 ME20
LC2 D18pp
GV2 DM220pp
0.983
1723
327
GV2 ME21
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DM221pp
1.063
11
15
2025
327
GV2 ME22
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DM222pp
1.063
15
15
18.5
2432
416
GV2 ME32
LC2 D32pp
GV2 DM232pp
1.073
Add-on blocks
Description
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between
5 rail
circuit-breaker and contactor
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
(2) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/20.
(3) See page 5/62.
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
Schemes :
page 1/14
1/9
References

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 P,
b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D,
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
kA
DP102 to
DP110
130
DP114
DP116
DP120
DP121
DP122
DP132
130
130
50
50
50
50
440 V
kA
130
130
50
20
20
20
20
500 V
kA
130
50
42
10
10
10
10
References

of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
GV2 DP102pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Weight
kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
A
0.160.25
A
2.4
GV2 P02
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP102pp
kg
0.686
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.250.40
GV2 P03
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP103pp
0.686
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.400.63
GV2 P04
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP104pp
0.686
0.631
13
GV2 P05
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP105pp
0.686
11.6
22.5
GV2 P06
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP106pp
0.686
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 P07
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP107pp
0.686
2.54
51
GV2 P08
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP108pp
0.696
46.3
78
GV2 P10
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP110pp
0.736
610
138
GV2 P14
LC1 D09pp
GV2 DP114pp
0.736
914
170
GV2 P16
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP116pp
0.741
1318
223
GV2 P20
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP120pp
0.736
11
11
1723
327
GV2 P21
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP121pp
0.741
11
15
2025
327
GV2 P22
LC1 D25pp
GV2 DP122pp
0.741
15
15
18.5
2432
416
GV2 P32
LC1 D32pp
GV2 DP132pp
0.741
18.5
3040
560
GV3 P401 (4)
LC1 D50App
1.725
18.5
22
3040
560
GV3 P401 (4)
LC1 D65App
1.730
22
3750
700
GV3 P501 (4)
LC1 D50App
1.725
22
30
3750
700
GV3 P501 (4)
LC1 D65App
1.730
30
37
4865
910
GV3 P651 (4)
LC1 D65App
1.730
Add-on blocks
Description
GV3 P651
+
LC1 D65App
10
Dimensions :
page 1/12
1/10
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between
5 rail
circuit-breaker and contactor
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) See page 5/62.
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD
(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
Schemes :
page 1/14
References
Combination automatic motor starters with overload

protection built into the circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 P,
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D,
Characteristics
Starter type
Breaking
capacity (lq)
(1)
GV2
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V
kA
DP202 to
DP210
130
DP214
DP216
DP220
DP221
DP222
DP232
130
130
50
50
50
50
440 V
kA
130
130
50
20
20
20
20
500 V
kA
130
50
42
10
10
10
10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing
of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz in AC-3
400/
440 V
500 V
415 V
GV2 DP202pp
Setting
range of
thermal
trips
Fixed
magnetic
tripping
current
13 Irth
Pre-assembled
Motor
circuitbreaker
Reference
Contactor
Reference
to be
completed
(2)
Basic reference,
to be completed
by adding the
voltage code
(3)
Weight
kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
A
0.160.25
A
2.4
GV2 P02
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP202pp
kg
1.053
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.250.40
GV2 P03
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP203pp
1.053
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
9
0.400.63
GV2 P04
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP204pp
1.053
0.631
13
GV2 P05
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP205pp
1.053
11.6
22.5
GV2 P06
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP206pp
1.053
1.62.5
33.5
GV2 P07
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP207pp
1.053
2.54
51
GV2 P08
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP208pp
1.073
46.3
78
GV2 P10
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP210pp
1.153
610
138
GV2 P14
LC2 D09pp
GV2 DP214pp
1.153
914
170
GV2 P16
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP216pp
1.163
1318
223
GV2 P20
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP220pp
1.153
11
11
1723
327
GV2 P21
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP221pp
1.163
11
15
2025
327
GV2 P22
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DP222pp
1.163
15
15
18.5
2432
416
GV2 P32
LC2 D32pp
GV2 DP232pp
1.163
18.5
3040
560
GV3 P401 (4)
LC2 D50App
2.750
18.5
22
3040
560
GV3 P401 (4)
LC2 D65App
2.760
22
3750
700
GV3 P501 (4)
LC2 D50App
2.750
22
30
3750
700
GV3 P501 (4)
LC2 D65App
2.760
30
37
4865
910
GV3 P651 (4)
LC2 D65App
2.760
Add-on blocks
Description
GV3 P651
+
LC2 D65App
Dimensions :
page 1/12
Mounting of
Sold in
Unit
Weight
GV2
lots of
reference
kg
10
GV2-AF3
0.016
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail
GV2-AF4
0.016
Mounting plate 10
LAD 311
(2) See page 5/62.
Volts
24
220
230
a 50/60 Hz
B7
M7
P7
c (5)
BD
(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
Schemes :
page 1/14
1/11
10
Dimensions,
mounting
TeSys motor starters - open

version
GV2 MEppKppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200
GV2 MEppK1pp
GV2 MEppK2pp
2
11
66
87
152
152
45
90
4
GV2 DMppppp
With adapter plate LAD 311
GV2 DM1pppp
GV2 DM2pppp
6
c1
45
c1
c
d1
d
GV2
b
c
c1
DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
176.4
99.6
94.1
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/12
DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
186.8
105.9
100.4
GV2
c
c1
d
d1
DMp02pp to
DMp20pp
135.6
130.1
112.5
107
234
125 3
DMp21pp to
DMp32pp
141.9
136.4
112.5
107
90
Dimensions,
mounting (continued)

version
GV2 DPppppp
With adapter plate LAD 311
GV2 DP1pppp
GV2 DP2pppp
c1
c
d1
d
GV2
b
c
c1
d
d1
234
125 3
45
90
c1
c
DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
176.4
105.6
100.1
100.5
95
DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
186.8
111.9
106.4
100.5
95
GV2
DPp02pp to
DPp08pp
141.6
136.5
c
c1
DPp10pp to
DPp32pp
147.9
142.4
GV3 Ppp1 + LC1 D40AD65A (for customer assembly)
Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2)
231
120
+3
0
138
Vertical mounting (1)
136
119
141
120
136
55
141
(1) For several side-by-side motor starters, the maximum current allowed is equal to the nominal current under 400 V.
Example: 55 A for a 30 kW motor under 400 V, for a GV3 P65 circuit-breaker and a LC1 D65A contactor association.
(2) The maximum current allowed is equal to 90 % of maximum current. Example: 45 A for a LC1 D50A contactor.
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/13
1/14
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
13/NO
21/NC
14
22
A2
A1
21/NC
22
A2
14
A1
13/NO
5/L3
T3/6
W
13/NO
14
13/NO
14
3/L2
5/L3
T3/6
T2/4
3/L2
T2/4
13/NO
14
1/L1
A1
5/L3
T3/6
T1/2
A2
3/L2
T2/4
GV2 DM2pppp
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
4
T1/2
21/NC
22
L3 6/T3
5
13/NO
6
14
L2 4/T2
1/L1
5/L3
GV2 DM1pppp
L1 2/T1
6/T3
5/L3
T3/6
3/L2
1/L1
T1/2
A1
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
GV2 MEppK1pp
A1
7
1
A2
4/T2
3/L2
6
T2/4
1/L1
2/T1
3
A2
1/L1
A1
T1/2
A2
Schemes

version
GV2 MEppK2pp
Schemes (continued)

version
5/L3
A1
A2
21/NC
22
13/NO
14
3
4
1
2
A2
21/NC
22
5
6
13/NO
3
4
L3 6/T3
14
3/L2
L1 2/T1
A1
2
21/NC
22
T3/6
T2/4
T1/2
A2
L2 4/T2
1/L1
5/L3
6/T3
5/L3
13/NO
14
4/T2
3/L2
2/T1
3/L2
GV2 DP2pppp
A1
1/L1
1/L1
GV2 DP1pppp
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts
A2
A1
A2
02
01
01
A1
KM2
02
KM1
A1
01
02
01
A1
A1
Control circuit c
A1
Control circuit a
KM1
KM2
A2
A2
KM2
A2
A2
02
KM1
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/15
Combination starters
for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker
and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors

50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
Circuit-breaker
Reference
440 V
500 V
Contactor
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
50
0.06
0.19
50
GV2 ME02
0.160.25
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.09
0.3
50
0.09
0.12
0.28
0.37
50
50
GV2 ME03
0.250.40
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.12
0.18
0.44
0.6
50
50
0.18
0.55
50
GV2 ME04
0.400.63
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
50
50
0.25
0.37
0.76
0.99
50
50
GV2 ME05
0.631
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.55
1.5
50
0.55
1.36
50
0.37
0.55
0.88
1.2
50
50
GV2 ME06
11.6
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.75
1.5
50
GV2 ME06
11.6
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.75
1.9
50
0.75
1.1
1.68
2.37
50
50
1.1
2.2
50
GV2 ME07
1.6.2.5
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
50
50
1.5
3.06
50
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
5050
GV2 ME08
2.54
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
2.2
4.9
50
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
50
50
5.2
50
GV2 ME10
46.3
LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
3
4
6.5
8.5
50
50
7.9
15
4
5.5
6.8
9.2
10
10
GV2 ME14
610
LC1 K09 or LC1 D09
5.5
11.5
15
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
GV2 ME16
914
LC1 K12 or LC1 D12
7.5
15.5
15
7.5
9
13.7
16.9
8
8
13.9
GV2 ME20
1318
LC1 D18
18.1
15
11
20.1
11
17.6
GV2 ME21
1723
LC1 D25
11
22
15
15
23
GV2 ME22
2025
LC1 D25
15
29
10
15
26.5
18.5
28
GV2 ME32
2432
LC1 D32
18.5
35
50
18.5
32.8
50
22
33
10
GV3 P40
3040
LC1 D40A
22
41
50
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 P50
3750
LC1 D50A
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
37
53
10
GV3 P65
4865
LC1 D65A
37
64
25
45
64
18
GV7 RE80
4880
LC1 D65A
37
66
15
45
76
10
55
78
GV3 ME80
5680
LC1 D80
37
66
25
45
76
25
55
78
18
GV7 RE80
4880
LC1 D80
45
80
25
GV7 RE100
60100
LC1 D95
50
90
25
GV7 RE100
60100
LC1 D115
55
97
25
75
106
30
GV7 RE150
90150
LC1 D115
75
132
35
75
125
35
90
128
30
GV7 RE150
90150
LC1 D150
90
146
35
GV7 RE150
90150
LC1 F185
90
160
35
110
156
30
GV7 RE220
132220
LC1 F185
110
178
35
132
160
184
224
30
30
GV7 RE220
132220
LC1 F265
110
195
35
132
215
35
GV7 RE220
132220
LC1 F225
)RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH[/&ZLWK/&
10
1/16

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker
and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

400/415 V
Circuit-breaker
Reference
440 V
500 V
Contactor
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
Ie
Iq (1)
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
130
0.06
0.19
130
GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02
0.160.25
LC1 D09
0.09
0.3
130
0.09
0.12
0.28
0.37
130
130
GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03
0.250.4
LC1 D09
0.12
0.18
0.44
0.6
130
130
0.18
0.55
130
GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04
0.40.63
LC1 D09
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
130
130
0.25
0.37
0.76
0.99
130
130
GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05
0.631
LC1 D09
0.55
1.5
130
0.55
1.36
130
0.37
0.55
0.88
1.2
130
130
GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06
11.6
LC1 D09
0.75
1.5
130
GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06
11.6
LC1 D09
0.75
1.9
130
0.75
1.1
1.68
2.37
130
130
1.1
2.2
130
GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07
1.62.5
LC1 D09
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
130
130
1.5
3.06
130
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
130
130
GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08
2.54
LC1 D09
2.2
4.9
130
GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10
46.3
LC1 D09
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
50
50
5.2
50
GV2 ME10
46.3
LC1 D09
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
130
130
5.2
130
GV2 P10
46.3
LC1 D09
3
4
6.5
8.5
130
130
GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14
610
LC1 D09
7.9
15
4
5.5
6.8
9.2
10
10
GV2 ME14
610
LC1 D09
7.9
130
4
5.5
6.8
9.2
50
50
GV2 P14
610
LC1 D12
5.5
11.5
130
5.5
7.5
10.4
13.7
50
50
7.5
9
12.4
13.9
42
42
GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16
914
LC1 D25
7.5
15.5
50
16.9
20
GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20
1318
LC1 D25
18.1
50
11
20.1
20
11
17.6
10
GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21
1723
LC1 D25
11
22
50
GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22
2025
LC1 D25
15
23
10
GV2 P22
2025
LC1 D32
15
29
35
15
26.5
25
18.5
28
10
GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32
2540
LC1 D32
18.5
35
50
GV3 P40
3040
LC1 D50A
18.5
32.8
50
22
33
10
GV3 P40
3040
LC1 D65A
22
41
50
GV3 P50
3750
LC1 D50A
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 P50
3750
LC1 D65A
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
GV3 P65
4865
LC1 D65A
37
53
10
GV3 P65
4865
LC1 D80
22
39
65
GV7 RS40
2540
LC1 D80
30
44
50
GV7 RS50
3050
LC1 D80
37
53
50
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
22
41
70
GV7 RS50
3050
LC1 D80
30
55
70
30
51.5
65
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
37
66
70
37
64
65
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
45
76
65
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D80
45
64
50
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D115
55
78
50
GV7 RS80
4880
LC1 D115
45
80
70
55
90
65
GV7 RS100
60100
LC1 D115
55
75
97
132
70
70
75
90
125
146
65
65
90
128
50
GV7 RS150
90150
LC1 D150
90
160
70
110
178
65
110
156
50
GV7 RS220
132220
LC1 F185
110
195
70
132
215
65
GV7 RS220
132220
LC1 F225
132
160
184
224
50
50
GV7 RS220
132220
LC1 F265
10
(2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V.
1/17

D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload
protection by separate thermal overload relay

400/415 V
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
kW
Ie
Contactor
Reference
Rating
Irm (1)
Thermal overload relay
Reference (2) Reference
Setting
range
Iq
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
50
0.06
0.19
50
GV2 LE03
0.4
LC1 K06
LR2 K0302
0.160.23
0.09
0.28
50
GV2 LE03
0.4
LC1 K06
LR2 K0303
0.230.36
0.09
0.3
50
0.12
0.37
50
GV2 LE03
0.4
LC1 K06
LR2 K0304
0.360.54
0.12
0.44
50
GV2 LE04
0.63
LC1 K06
LR2 K0304
0.360.54
0.18
0.6
50
0.18
0.55
50
GV2 LE04
0.63
LC1 K06
LR2 K0305
0.540.8
0.25
0.76
50
GV2 LE05
13
LC1 K06
LR2 K0305
0.540.8
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
50
50
0.37
50
0.37
0.88
50
GV2 LE05
13
LC1 K06
LR2 K0306
0.81.2
0.55
1.5
50
0.55
1.36
50
0.55
0.75
1.2
1.5
50
50
GV2 LE06
1.6
22.5
LC1 K06
LR2 K0307
1.21.8
0.75
1.68
50
GV2 LE07
2.5
33.5
LC1 K06
LR2 K0307
1.21.8
0.75
1.1
1.9
2.7
50
50
1.1
2.37
50
1.1
2.2
50
GV2 LE07
2.5
33.5
LC1 K06
LR2 K0308
1.82.6
1.5
3.6
50
1.5
3.06
50
1.5
2.9
50
GV2 LE08
51
LC1 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
2.2
3.9
50
GV2 LE08
51
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
2.2
4.9
50
2.2
4.4
50
5.2
50
GV2 LE10
6.3
78
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
5.77
50
GV2 LE10
6.3
78
LC1 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
7.9
15
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 K09
LR2 K0314
5.58
6.5
50
6.8
10
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 K09
LR2 K0314
5.58
8.5
50
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
5.5
11.5
15
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC1 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
7.5
13.7
13.9
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
7.5
15.5
15
16.9
GV2 LE20
18
223
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
18.1
15
11
17.6
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
11
22
15
11
20.1
15
23
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
29
10
15
26.5
18.5
28
GV2 LE32
32
416
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
18.5
35
50
18.5
32.5
50
22
33
10
GV3 L40
40
560
LC1 D40A
LRD 340
3040
22
41
50
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 L50
50
700
LC1 D50A
LRD 350
3750
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

10
1/18

(continued)
0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)

400/415 V
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Contactor
Reference
Rating
Irm (1)
Setting
range
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
Iq
kA
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
37
53
10
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
37
64
50
37
53
10
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
45
64
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D80
LRD 3361
4865
37
66
70
45
76
65
55
78
25
NS80HMA
80
1040
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1300
LC1 D95
LRD 3365
80104
50
90
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1200
LC1 D115
LRD 4365
80104
75
106
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1500
LC1 D115
LRD 4367
95120
55
97
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1350
LC1 D115
LRD 4367
95120
75
132
(3)
75
125
(3)
90
128
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1800
LC1 D150
LRD 4369
110140
90
146
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1950
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
90
160
(3)
110
156
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2200
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2640
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
110
178
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2420
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
184
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2640
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
132
215
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2860
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3200
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
224
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2860
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
256
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3520
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
(3)
200
321
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4160
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
280
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3840
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4160
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
200
350
(3)
220
353
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5000
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
401
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5550
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
344
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5000
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
220
388
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
430
(3)
280
470
(3)
315
432
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
6000
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
355
488
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
6500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7381
380630
NS100pMA

(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA)
NS160pMA and NS250pMA
400/415 V
25
70
36
70
70
130
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
500 V
18
50
30
50
50
70
660/690 V
10
10
20
35
Code
10
1/19

(continued)

400/415 V
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
Iq
Ie
Contactor
Reference
Rating Irm (1)
Setting
range
Iq
kA
kW
kA
kW
kA
0.06
0.2
130
0.06
0.19
130
GV2 L03 or LE03
0.4
LC1 D09
LRD 02
0.160.25
0.09
0.3
130
0.09
0.12
0.28
0.37
130
130
GV2 L03 or LE03
0.4
LC1 D09
LRD 03
0.250.40
0.12
0.18
0.44
0.6
130
130
0.18
0.55
130
GV2 L04 or LE04
0.63
LC1 D09
LRD 04
0.40.63
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
130
130
0.25
0.37
0.76
0.99
130
130
GV2 L05 or LE05
13
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.37
0.88
130
GV2 L05 or LE05
13
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.55
1.5
130
0.55
1.36
130
0.55
0.75
1.2
1.5
130
130
GV2 L06 or LE06
1.6
22.5
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.75
1.9
130
0.75
1.68
130
1.1
2.2
130
GV2 L07 or LE07
2.5
33.5
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
130
130
1.1
2.37
130
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
130
130
GV2 L08 or LE08
51
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
1.5
3.06
130
GV2 L08 or LE08
51
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
2.2
4.9
130
5.2
13
GV2 L10 or LE10
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
50
50
5.2
50
GV2 LE10
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
130
130
5.2
130
GV2 L10
6.3
78
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
130
GV2 L14 or LE14
10
10
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
6.8
10
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 D12
LRD 12
5.58
6.8
50
GV2 L14
10
138
LC1 D12
LRD 12
5.58
8.5
130
GV2 L14 or LE14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
7.9
15
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
7.9
130
GV2 L14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
9.2
10
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
9.2
50
GV2 L14
10
138
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11.5
130
5.5
10.4
50
7.5
12.4
42
GV2 L16
14
170
LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
7.5
13.7
50
GV2 L16
14
170
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
7.5
15.5
50
16.9
20
13.9
42
GV2 L20
18
223
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
18.1
22
50
50
11
20.1
20
GV2 L22
25
327
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
11
15
17.6
23
10
10
GV2 L22
25
327
LC1 D32
LRD 22
1624
15
29
50
15
26.5
50
GV3 L32
32
448
LC1 D40A
LRD 332
2332
18.5
28
10
GV3 L32
32
448
LC1 D65A
LRD 332
2332

10
1/20

(continued)

400/415 V
440 V
Circuit-breaker
500 V
Reference
Rating Irm (1)
Contactor
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
kA
kW
kA
kW
Iq
kA
18.5
35
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LC1 D50A
LRD 340
3040
18.5
32.5
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LC1 D65A
LRD 340
3040
22
41
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LC1 D50A
LRD 350
3750
22
39
50
30
44
10
GV3 L50
50
700
LC1 D65A
LRD 350
3750
37
55
50
37
51.5
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
37
64
50
37
53
10
GV3 L65
65
910
LC1 D80
LRD 3359
4865
37
66
70
45
76
65
NS80HMA
80
1000
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
55
78
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1040
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
(3)
55
90
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1300
LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
55
97
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1500
LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
75
106
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1050
LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
75
132
(3)
75
125
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1950
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
146
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1950
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
128
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
160
(3)
110
178
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2420
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
156
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1540
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2860
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
215
(3)
132
184
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
2200
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
(3)
160
256
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3520
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
224
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2200
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4000
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
321
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
4000
LC1 F330
LR9 F7379
300500
200
280
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
3500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
200
350
(3)
220
250
353
401
(3)
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
315
344
432
(3)
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
4500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
220
250
388
430
(3)
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
6250
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
355
488
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
5000
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630

(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
400/415 V
NS100pMA
25
70
36
70
70
130
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
500 V
18
50
30
50
50
70
660/690 V
10
10
20
35
Code
10
1/21

D.O.L starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz

in category AC-3
Fuse carrier (1)

(basic block)
aM fuses
400/415 V
Reference
Size
Rating
Ie
kW
440 V
500 V
Ie
kW
Ie
kW
Contactor

class 10
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
0.06
0.2
0.06
0.19
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0302
0.160.23
0.09
0.28
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0303
0.230.36
0.09
0.12
0.3
0.44
0.12
0.37
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0304
0.360.54
0.18
0.6
0.18
0.25
0.55
0.76
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0305
0.540.8
0.25
0.37
0.85
1.1
0.37
0.37
0.88
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0306
0.81.2
0.55
1.5
0.55
0.75
1.36
1.68
0.55
0.75
1.2
1.5
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0307
1.21.8
0.75
1.1
1.9
2.7
1.1
2.37
1.1
1.5
2.2
2.9
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0308
1.82.6
1.5
3.6
1.5
3.06
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
2.2
4.9
2.2
3
3.9
5.2
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
2.2
4.42
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
6.5
5.77
6.8
LS1 D32
10 x 38
LC1 K09
LR2 K0314
5.58
8.5
7.9
5.5
9.2
LS1 D32
10 x 38
12
LC1 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.

(2))RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH[/&ZLWK/&.
10
1/22

(continued)

in category AC-3
Fuse carrier (1)

(basic block)
aM fuses
400/415 V
Reference
Size
Rating
440 V
500 V
Ie
Ie
Ie
kW
kW
kW
Contactor

classe 10
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
5.5
11.5
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
LS1 D32
10 x 38
16
LC1 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
7.5
15.5
7.5
13.7
13.9
LS1 D32
10 x 38
16
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
16.9
LS1 D32
10 x 38
20
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
18.1
22
11
20.1
11
15
17.6
23
GK1 EK
14 x 51
25
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
29
15
26.5
18.5
28
GK1 EK
14 x 51
32
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
18.5
35
18.5
32.8
22
33
GK1 EK
14 x 51
40
LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
22
41
22
39
30
44
GK1 FK
22 x 58
50
LC1 D50
LRD 3357
3750
30
51.5
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D50
LRD 3359
4865
37
53
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65
LRD 3359
4865
30
55
37
64
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65
LRD 3361
5570
45
64
GK1 FK
22 x 58
80
LC1 D80
LRD 3361
5570
37 (3)
66
45
76
GK1 FK
22 x 58
100
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
55
78
GK1 FK
22 x 58
100
LC1 D95
LRD 3365
8093
55
90
GK1 FK
22 x 58
125
LC1 D115
LRD 4365
80104
55
97
75
106
GK1 FK
22 x 58
125
LC1 D115
LRD 4367
95120
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.

(3) 400 V maximum.
10
1/23

(continued)

in category AC-3
Switchdisconnector
aM fuses
400/415 V
Reference (1)
Size
Rating
GS1 DD
10 x 38
Ie
kW
0.06
0.2
440 V
500 V
Ie
kW
0.06
0.19
Ie
kW
Contactor

classe 10
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting
range
LC1 D09
LRD 02
0.160.25
0.09
0.28
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 03
0.250.4
0.09
0.12
0.3
0.44
0.12
0.37
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 04
0.40.63
0.18
0.6
0.18
0.25
0.55
0.76
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.85
1.1
1.5
0.37
0.55
1
1.36
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.88
1.2
1.5
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.75
1.9
0.75
1.1
1.68
2.37
1.1
2.2
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
1.5
3.06
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.9
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
2.2
4.9
2.2
4.42
5.2
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
5.77
6.8
GS1 DD
10 x 38
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.5
7.9
5.5
9.2
GS1 DD
10 x 38
10
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11.5
5.5
10.4
7.5
12.4
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
15.5
7.5
13.7
13.9
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
16.9
GSp F
14 x 51
20
LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
18.1
22
11
20.1
11
15
17.6
23
GSp F
14 x 51
25
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
29
15
26.5
18.5
28
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
18.5
35
18.5
32.8
22
33
GSp F
14 x 51
40
LC1 D40A
LRD 340
3040
22
41
22
39
30
44
GSp J
22 x 58
50
LC1 D50A
LRD 350
3750
30
51.5
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
37
53
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
30
55
37
64
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D65A
LRD 365
4865
45
64
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D95
LRD 3361
5570
37
66
45
76
GSp J
22 x 58
100
LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
55
78
GSp J
22 x 58
100
LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
45
80
GSp J
22 x 58
100
LC1 D95
LRD 3365
8093
55
97
55
90
75
106
GSp L
T0
125
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
132
75
125
90
128
GSp L
T0
160
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
160
90
146
110
156
GSp N
T1
200
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
110
178
132
184
GSp N
T1
250
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
132
215
160
224
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
256
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
200
321
200
280
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
200
220
350
388
220
353
250
344
GS2 S
T3
500
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
430
250
401
GS2 S
T3
500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
315
355
432
488
GS2 S
T3
630
LC1 F500
LR9 F7381
380630
315
540
315
505
GS2 S
T3
630
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
355
400
549
611
400
552
GS2 V
T4
800
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
10
1/24
(continued)

0.75 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase
motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
Switchdisconnector
aM fuses
Ie
Reference (1)
Size
kW
Rating
Contactor

classe 10
Reference (2)
Reference
Setting range
A
0.75
1.1
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.6
1.1
1.6
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.6
1.5
2.1
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
2.2
2.8
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
3.8
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
4.9
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
5.5
6.7
GSp F
14 x 51
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
7.5
8.9
GSp F
14 x 51
10
LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
11
12.8
GSp F
14 x 51
16
LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
15
17
GSp F
14 x 51
20
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
18.5
21
GSp F
14 x 51
25
LC1 D32
LRD 22
1624
22
24
GSp F
14 x 51
32
LC1 D40A
LRD 332
2332
30
32
GSp F
14 x 51
40
LC1 D40A
LRD 340
3040
37
39
GSp F
14 x 51
50
LC1 D65A
LRD 350
3750
45
47
GSp J
22 x 58
63
LC1 D80
LR2 D3357
3750
55
57
GSp J
22 x 58
80
LC1 D115
LR2 D3359
4865
75
77
GSp KK
T00
100
LC1 D115
LR2 D3363
6380
90
93
GSp KK
T00
125
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
110
113
GSp KK
T00
125
LC1 F185
LR9 D5369
90150
132
134
GSp L
T0
160
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
160
162
GSp N
T1
200
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
200
203
GSp N
T1
250
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
224
GSp QQ
T2
250
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
250
250
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC1 F400
LR9 F7375
200330
315
313
GSp QQ
T2
355
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
355
354
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC1 F630
LR9 F7379
300500
400
400
GS2 S
T3
500
LC1 F630
LR9 F7379
300500
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
10
1/25

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and
overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
Maximum operating rate:/&.VWDUWVKRXU/&'VWDUWVKRXU

Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
50-60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
P
kW
Circuit-breaker
440 V
Ie
IrD (1)
Iq (2)
Reference
Ie
IrD (1)
Iq (2)
Star-delta
contactors
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference
kA
kW
kA
1.5
3.6
50
1.5
3.06
1.8
50
GV2 ME08
A
2.54
LC3 K06
2.2
4.9
2.9
50
2.2
3
4.42
5.77
2.6
3.3
50
50
GV2 ME10
46.3
LC3 K06
3
4
6.5
8.5
3.8
4.9
50
50
7.9
4.6
15
GV2 ME14
610
LC3 K06
5.5
11.5
6.4
15
5.5
10.4
GV2 ME16
914
LC3 K06
7.5
15.5
8.6
15
7.5
13.7
7.9
GV2 ME20
1318
LC3 K09
16.9
9.8
GV2 ME20
1318
LC3 D12A
18.1
10
15
11
20.1
12
GV2 ME21
1723
LC3 D12A
11
22
12
15
GV2 ME22
2025
LC3 D12A
15
29
17
10
15
26.5
15
GV2 ME32
2432
LC3 D18A
18.5
35
20
50
18.5
32.8
19
50
GV3 P40
3040
LC3 D18A
22
39
23
50
GV3 P50
3750
LC3 D32A
22
41
24
50
30
51.5
30
50
GV3 P50
3750
LC3 D32A
30
55
33
50
30
51.5
30
50
GV3 P65
4865
LC3 D32A
37
66
40
50
37
64
37
50
GV3 P65
4865
3 x LC1 D40A (3)
37
66
40
25
37
64
37
25
GV7 RE80
4880
3 x LC1 D40A (3)
45
76
44
10
GV3 ME80
5680
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
45
76
44
25
GV7 RE80
4880
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
45
55
80
97
47
58
25
25
55
90
52
25
GV7 RE100
60100
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
75
132
78
35
75
125
72
35
GV7 RE150
90150
LC3 D80
90
146
84
35
GV7 RE150
90150
LC3 D115
90
110
160
195
95
115
35
35
110
178
103
35
GV7 RE220
132220
LC3 D115
132
215
124
35
GV7 RE220
132220
LC3 D150
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.

(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
10
1/26
Combination starters or
customer assembly

Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and
overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
(continued)

Maximum operating rate:/&'VWDUWVKRXU/&)VWDUWVKRXU
Maximum starting time:/&'VHFRQGV/&)VHFRQGV
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3
Circuit-breaker
400/415 V
Reference
440 V
Iq (1)
Star-delta contactors
Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference
Ie
Iq
Ie
kW
kA
kW
kA
1.5
3.6
130
1.5
3.06
130
GV2 P08
2.54
3 x LC1 D09 (2)
2.2
4.9
130
2.2
4.42
130
GV2 P10
46.3
3 x LC1 D18 (3)
5.77
130
GV2 P10
4...6.3
3 x LC1 D18 (3)
6.5
130
GV2 P14
610
3 x LC1 D18 (3)
8.5
130
7.9
130
GV2 P14
610
3 x LC1 D18 (3)
5.5
11.5
130
5.5
10.4
50
GV2 P16
914
3 x LC1 D25 (3)
7.5
13.7
50
GV2 P16
914
3 x LC1 D25 (3)
7.5
15.5
50
16.9
20
GV2 P20
1318
3 x LC1 D25 (3)
18.1
50
11
20.1
20
GV2 P21
1723
3 x LC1 D25 (3)
11
22
50
GV2 P22
2025
3 x LC1 D25 (3)
15
29
50
15
26.5
50
GV3 P32
2332
3 x LC1 D40A (4)
18.5
35
50
GV3 P40
3040
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
18.5
32.8
50
GV3 P40
3040
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
22
41
50
GV3 P50
3750
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
22
39
50
GV3 P50
3750
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
30
55
50
30
51.5
50
GV3 P65
4865
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
37
66
70
37
64
65
GV7 RS80
4880
3 x LC1 D80 (5)
45
76
65
GV7 RS80
4880
3 x LC1 D80 (5)
45
80
70
GV7 RS100
60100
3 x LC1 D115 (6)
55
97
70
55
90
65
GV7 RS100
60100
3 x LC1 D115 (6)
75
132
70
75
125
65
GV7 RS150
90150
3 x LC1 D150 (6)
90
146
65
GV7 RS150
90150
3 x LC1 D150 (6)
90
160
70
110
178
65
GV7 RS220
132220
3 x LC1 F185 (7)
110
195
70
132
215
65
GV7 RS220
132220
3 x LC1 F225 (7)
(2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D09, star-delta starter kit LAD 91217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D18 or LC1 D25, star-delta starter kit LAD 93217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(5) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D80, star-delta starter kit LA9 D8017 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(6) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D115 or LC1 D150, see page 1/41
(7) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 F185 or LC1 F225, see pages 1/47 and 1/49
10
1/27
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload

Maximum operating rate:/&.DQG/&)VWDUWVKRXU/&'VWDUWVKRXU

Maximum starting time:/&.DQG/&'VHFRQGV/&)VHFRQGV
400/415 V
Circuit-breaker
440 V
Reference
Ie
IrD (1)
Iq
Ie
IrD (1) Iq
kW
kA
kW
kA
1.5
3.6
50
1.5
2.2
3.06
4.42
1.8
3
50
50
2.2
4.9
50
5.77
50
GV2 LE10
6.5
50
GV2 LE14
7.9
50
GV2 LE10
8.5
50
5.5
10.4
5.5
11.5
15
7.5
7.5
15.5
15
18.1
11
Rating Irm (2)
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
Reference
Setting
range
51
LC3 K06
LR2 K0308
1.82.6
6.3
78
LC3 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
10
138
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
6.3
78
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
15
GV2 LE14
10
138
LC3 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC3 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
13.7
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC3 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
GV2 LE20
18
223
LC3 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
16.9
GV2 LE16
14
170
LC3 D12A
LRD 16
913
10
15
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC3 K12
LR2 K0316
811.5
11
20.1
12
GV2 LE20
18
223
LC3 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
22
12
15
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC3 K12
LR2 K0321
1014
15
26.5
15
GV2 LE22
25
327
LC3 D18A
LRD 21
1218
15
29
16
10
GV2 LE32
32
384
LC3 D18A
LRD 21
1218
18.5
35
20
50
18.5
32.8
19
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LC3 D18A
LRD 22
1624
22
41
24
50
22
39
23
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
51.5
30
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
55
33
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LC3 D32A
LRD 35
3038
37
64
37
50
GV3 L65
65
910
3 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 340
3040
45
76
44
65
NS80HMA
80
640
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 350
3750
55
90
52
65
NS80HMA
80
800
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 365
4865
4865
GV2 LE08
37
66
40
70
NS80HMA
80
640
3 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 365
75
125
72
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC3 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
47
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
800
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 350
3750
55
97
58
(3)
NS100pMA (3)
100
1200
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
LRD 365
4865
75
132
78
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC3 D80
LRD 3363
6380
90
146
85
(3)
NS160pMA (3)
150
1200
LC3 D115
LRD 4365
80104
90
160
96
(3)
110
178
103
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1760
LC3 D115
LRD 4365
80104
132
215
125
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1760
LC3 D150
LRD 4369
110140
110140
110
195
116
(3)
NS250pMA (3)
220
1760
LC3 D115
LRD 4369
160
256
148
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2240
LC3 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
200
321
186
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
3150
LC3 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
230
139
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2240
LC3 D150
LRD 4369
110140
160
280
165
(3)
NS400pMA (3)
320
2560
LC3 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
200
350
204
(3)
220
353
204
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
3150
LC3 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
220
388
225
(3)
250
401
233
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
3500
LC3 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
280
480
278
(3)
NS630pMA (3)
500
4000
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
315
505
295
(3)
C801p+STR35ME
800
4000
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
315
540
322
(3)
355
518
300
(3)
C801p+STR35ME
800
4500
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
375
575
334
(3)
C801p+STR35ME
800
5000
LC3 F400
LR9 F7379
300500

(3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
10
NS100pMA
NS160pMA, NS250pMA
NS400pMA, NS630pMA
C801p+STR35ME
400/415 V
25
70
36
70
70
130
70
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
65
100
Code
1/28
150
Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload

(continued)

400/415 V
440 V
P
Ie
Iq
P
Ie
kW
A
kA
kW
A
1.5
3.6
130
1.5
3.06
Circuit-breaker
Iq
kA
130
Reference
Rating Irm (1)
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
GV2 L08
A
4
A
51
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 08
A
2.54
Reference
Setting
range
2.2
3
4.9
6.5
130
130
2.2
3
4
4.42
5.77
7.9
130
130
20
GV2 L10
6.3
78
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 10
46
GV2 L14
10
138
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 14
710
8.5
130
GV2 L14
10
138
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 16
913
5.5
11.5
50
5.5
10.4
20
GV2 L16
14
170
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 16
913
7.5
15.5
50
7.5
13.7
20
GV2 L20
18
223
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
16.9
20
GV2 L22
25
327
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 21
1218
9
11
15
18.1
22
29
50
50
50
11
15
20.1
26.5
20
50
GV2 L22
25
327
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
GV3 L32
32
448
3 x LC1 D40A (2)
LRD 332
2332
18.5
35
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LRD 340
3040
18.5
32.8
50
GV3 L40
40
560
LRD 340
3040
22
41
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LRD 350
3750
22
39
50
GV3 L50
50
700
LRD 350
3750
30
55
50
30
51.5
50
GV3 L65
65
910
LRD 365
4865
37
64
50
GV3 L65
65
910
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3359
4865
37
66
70
45
76
65
NS80HMA
80
640
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
80
(2)
55
90
(2)
NS100pMA (2)
100
800
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
55
97
(2)
NS160pMA (2)
150
1200
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
75
125
(2)
NS160pMA (2)
150
1200
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
132
(2)
90
146
(2)
NS160pMA (2)
150
1200
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
90
160
(2)
110
178
(2)
NS250pMA (2)
220
1760
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
195
(2)
NS250pMA (2)
220
1760
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
215
(2)
NS250pMA (2)
220
1760
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F7375
200330
132
230
(2)
160
256
(2)
NS400pMA (2)
320
2240
3 x LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
280
(2)
NS400pMA (2)
320
2560
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
321
(2)
NS400pMA (2)
320
2880
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7379
300500
200
350
(2)
220
353
(2)
NS630pMA (2)
500
3150
3 x LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
220
388
(2)
250
401
(2)
NS630pMA (2)
500
3500
3 x LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
250
430
(2)
NS630pMA (2)
500
4000
3 x LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500

(2) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
NS100pMA
NS160pMA, NS250pMA
NS400pMA, NS630pMA
400/415 V
25
70
36
70
70
130
440 V
25
65
35
65
65
130
Code
E
S
E
S
H
L
1/29
10

Star-delta starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses)
10
Maximum operating rate:/&.DQG/&)VWDUWVKRXU/&'VWDUWVKRXU

Maximum starting time:/&.DQG/&'VHFRQGV/&)VHFRQGV
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V
P
Ie
IrD (1) Iq
kW
A
A
kA
1.5
3.5
2
50
Fuse carrier
(basic block)
Reference
440 V
P
kW
1.5
Ie
A
3.06
IrD (1)
A
2
2.2
50
6.5
50
2.2
3
8.4
50
5.5
11
7.5
14.8
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
Size
Iq
kA
50
Reference
LS1 D32
A
10 x 38 4
LC3 K06
LR2 K0308
A
1.82.6
LS1 D32
10 x 38 6
LC3 K06
LR2 K0310
2.63.7
4.42
5.77
3
3
50
50
LS1 D32
LS1 D32
10 x 38 8
10 x 38 8
LC3 K06
LC3 K06
LR2 K0310
LR2 K0312
2.63.7
3.75.5
7.9
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 12
LC3 K06
LR2 K0312
3.75.5
50
5.5
10.4
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 16
LC3 K06
LR2 K0314
5.58
50
7.5
13.7
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 16
LC3 K09
LR2 K0316
811.5
18.1
10
100
16.9
10
50
LS1 D32
10 x 38 20
LC3 D12A
LRD 16
913
11
21
12
100
11
20.1
12
100
GK1 EK
14 x 51 25
LC3 D12A
LRD 16
913
15
28.5
16
100
15
26.5
15
100
GK1 EK
14 x 51 32
LC3 D18A
LRD 21
1218
18.5
35
20
100
18.5
32.8
19
100
GK1 EK
14 x 51 40
LC3 D18A
LRD 22
1624
22
39
23
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 50
LC3 D18A
LRD 22
1624
22
42
24
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 50
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
51.5
30
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 63
LC3 D32A
LRD 32
2332
30
57
33
100
37
64
37
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 80
LC3 D40
LRD 3355
3040
37
69
40
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 80
LC3 D40
LRD 3357
3750
45
76
44
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 80
LC3 D50
LRD 3357
3750
45
81
47
100
GK1 FK
22 x 58 100
LC3 D50
LRD 3357
3750
55
90
52
100
GSp K
22 x 58 100
LC3 D50
LRD 3359
4865
55
100
58
100
GSp K
22 x 58 125
LC3 D50
LRD 3361
5570
75
135
78
100
75
125
72
100
GSp L
T0
160
LC3 D80
LRD 3363
6380
90
146
84
100
GSp L
T0
160
LC3 D115
LRD 4365
80104
90
165
95
100
GSp N
T1
200
LC3 D115
LRD 4367
95120
110
200
115
100
110
178
103
100
GSp N
T1
200
LC3 D115
LRD 4367
95120
132
240
139
100
132
215
124
100
GSp QQ
T2
250
LC3 D150
LRD 4369
110140
160
285
165
100
160
256
148
100
GSp QQ
T2
315
LC3 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
200
321
185
100
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC3 F225
LR9 F5369
132220
220
388
225
100
GSp QQ
T2
400
LC3 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
250
401
233
100
GS2 S
T3
500
LC3 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
280
480
278
100
GS2 S
T3
500
LC3 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
315
555
322
100
315
355
375
505
518
575
293
300
334
100
100
100
GS2 S
GS2 S
T3
T3
630
630
LC3 F330
LC3 F400
LR9 F7375
LR9 F7379
200330
300500
1/30
aM fuses
Rating

Setting
range

(NF C or DIN fuses)


400/415 V
440 V
P
Ie
Iq
P
kW
A
kA
kW
1.5
3.5
50
1.5
SwitchaM fuses
disconnector-fuse
Reference
Size
Rating
Star-delta
contactors
Reference
Ie
A
3.06
Iq
kA
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
A
4
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 08
A
2.54
2.2
50
2.2
4.42
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
50
5.77
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.4
50
7.9
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
10
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11
50
5.5
10.4
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
3 x LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
14.8
50
7.5
13.7
50
GS1 DD
10 x 38
16
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
9
11
15
18.1
21
28.5
100
100
100
9
11
15
16.9
20.1
26.5
100
100
100
GSp F
GSp F
14 x 51
14 x 51
25
32
3 x LC1 D25
3 x LC1 D32
LRD 22
LRD 32
1624
2332
18.5
35
100
18.5
32.8
100
GSp F
14 x 51
40
3 x LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
22
42
100
22
39
100
GSp F
22 x 58
50
3 x LC1 D50
LRD 3357
3750
30
57
100
30
51.5
100
GSp J
22 x 58
80
3 x LC1 D65
LRD 3361
5570
37
69
100
37
64
100
GSp J
22 x 58
80
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
76
100
GSp J
22 x 58
80
3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3365
8093
45
81
100
GSp J
22 x 58
100
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
55
90
100
GSp L
T0
125
3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
55
100
100
GSp L
T0
125
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
125
100
GSp L
T0
160
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
75
135
100
GSp L
T0
160
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 D5369
90150
90
165
100
90
146
100
GSp N
T1
200
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
200
100
110
178
100
GSp N
T1
250
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
132
240
100
132
215
100
GSp QQ
T2
315
3 x LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
285
100
160
256
100
GSp QQ
T2
315
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
200
321
100
GSp QQ
T2
400
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7379
300500
200
220
250
352
388
437
100
100
100
220
250
353
401
100
100
GS2 S
GS2 S
T3
T3
500
500
3 x LC1 F400
3 x LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
LR9 F7379
300500
300500
315
555
100
315
505
100
GS2 S
T3
630
3 x LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
355
605
100
355
400
549
611
100
100
GS2 V
GS2 V
T4
T4
800
800
3 x LC1 F630
3 x LC1 F780
LR9 F7381
LR9 F7381
380630
380630
Reference
Setting
range
10
1/31

D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)

415 V
P
440 V
500 V
Switchdisconnectorfuse
BS fuses
Contactor
Reference
Size
Rating
Reference (1)
Reference
Setting
range
Ie
Ie
Ie
kW
0.06
A
0.22
kW
0.06
A
0.19
kA
GS1 DDB
A1
A
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 02
A
0.160.25
0.09
0.28
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 03
0.250.4
0.09
0.12
0.36
0.42
0.12
0.37
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 04
0.40.63
0.18
0.6
0.18
0.55
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 2
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.25
0.76
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 4
LC1 D09
LRD 05
0.631
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.88
1
1.5
0.37
0.55
0.75
1
1.36
1.68
0.37
0.55
0.75
1
1.2
1.5
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 6
LC1 D09
LRD 06
11.7
0.75
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 10
LC1 D09
LRD 07
1.62.5
1.5
2.6
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 10
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
1.5
3.5
1.5
3.06
2.2
3.8
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 16
LC1 D09
LRD 08
2.54
2.2
2.2
4.42
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 16
LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
5.77
6.5
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.4
7.9
5.5
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11
5.5
10.4
7.5
12
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M25
LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
14
7.5
13.7
13.9
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M32
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
18.1
16.9
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M35
LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
11
21
11
20
11
15
18.4
23
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M50
LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
28.5
15
26.5
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M63
LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
22
33
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M80
LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
22
42
22
39
30
45
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
LC1 D50
LRD 3357
3750
30
51.5
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
LC1 D50
LRD 3359
4865
30
57
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
LC1 D65
LRD 3359
4865
45
76
45
65
GS2 LLB
A4
TCP 100M125 LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
45
81
55
80
GS2 LLB
A4
TCP 100M125 LC1 D95
LRD 3365
8093
55
100
GS2 LLB
A4
TCP 100M160 LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
55
90
GS2 LLB
A4
TCP 100M160 LC1 D115
LR9 D5367
60100
80
116
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
80
138
80
132
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200M250
LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
100
110
143
156
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200M250
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
100
182
100
162
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M250
LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
196
110
178
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M315
LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
140
200
GS2 NB
B3
TKF 315M355
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
132220
140
250
140
226
160
220
GS2 NB
B3
TKF 315M355
LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
285
160
256
GS2 QQB
B4
TKF 315M355
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
310
GS2 QQB
B4
TMF 400
LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
220
388
220
353
257
362
GS2 QQB
B4
TMF 400M450 LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
270
380
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
257
270
450
460
257
270
412
433
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 500
LC1 F500
LR9 F7381
380630
375
610
375
577
375
425
508
556
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 630
LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
10
1/32

(BS fuses)
(continued)

415 V
440 V
Switchdisconnectorfuse
BS fuses
Contactor
Reference
Size
Rating
Reference
Reference
Setting
range
Ie
Iq
Ie
Iq
kW
1.5
A
3.5
kA
50
kW
1.5
A
3.06
kA
50
GS1 DDB
A1
A
NIT 16
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 08
A
2.54
2.2
50
2.2
4.42
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 16
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 10
46
6.5
50
5.77
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 12
5.58
8.4
50
7.9
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20
3 x LC1 D09
LRD 14
710
5.5
11
50
5.5
10.4
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M25
3 x LC1 D12
LRD 16
913
7.5
14.8
50
7.5
13.7
50
GS1 DDB
A1
NIT 20M32
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
18.1
50
16.9
50
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M35
3 x LC1 D18
LRD 21
1218
11
21
50
11
20.1
50
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M50
3 x LC1 D25
LRD 22
1624
15
28.5
50
15
26.5
50
GS2 GB
A2
TIA 32M63
3 x LC1 D32
LRD 32
2332
22
42
50
22
39
50
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M80
3 x LC1 D40
LRD 3355
3040
30
51.5
50
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
3 x LC1 D50
LRD 3359
4865
30
57
50
GS2 GB
A3
TIS 63M100
3 x LC1 D65
LRD 3359
4865
45
81
50
45
76
50
GS2 LLB
A4
TCP 100M125 3 x LC1 D80
LRD 3363
6380
55
100
80
55
90
80
GS2 LLB
A4
TCP 100M160 3 x LC1 D115
LR9 D5369
90150
80
138
80
80
132
80
GS2 LB
B2
TF 200M250
3 x LC1 D150
LR9 D5369
90150
100
182
80
100
162
80
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M250
3 x LC1 F185
LR9 F5371
132220
110
196
80
110
178
80
GS2 MMB
B2
TF 200M315
3 x LC1 F225
LR9 F5371
132220
140
250
80
140
226
80
GS2 NB
B3
TFK 315M355
3 x LC1 F265
LR9 F7375
200330
160
285
80
160
256
80
GS2 QQB
B3
TFK 315M355
3 x LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
200330
220
388
80
220
353
80
GS2 QQB
B4
TMF 400M450 3 x LC1 F400
LR9 F7379
300500
257
270
450
460
80
80
257
270
412
433
80
80
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 500
3 x LC1 F500
LR9 F7379
300500
375
610
80
375
577
80
GS2 SB
C2
TTM 630
3 x LC1 F630
LR9 F7381
380630
10
1/33
References

4 to 37 kW, (1), with isolating device, pre-assembled
References
526459
LC4 D09App
Utilisation category AC-3

of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
220 V 380 V
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.2
4
4
4
500 V
kW
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
11
7.5
Fuses to be
WWHGE\WKH
customer
Basic reference,
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
Weight
660 V
690 V
kW
Operational
current
440 V up
to
A
9
Size
Type
aM
A
10 x 38 12
LC4 D09App
kg
0.870
7.5
12
10 x 38 16
LC4 D12App
0.870
10
18
10 x 38 20
LC4 D18App
1.150
11
11
15
25
10 x 38 25
LC4 D25App
1.580
15
15
15
18.5
18.5
32
14 x 51 32
LC4 D32App
2.630
11
18.5
22
22
22
30
40
14 x 51 40
LC4 D40pp
2.930
15
22
25
30
30
33
50
22 x 58 63
LC4 D50pp
3.200
18.5
30
37
37
37
37
65
22 x 58 80
LC4 D65pp
3.340
22
37
45
45
55
45
80
22 x 58 80
LC4 D80pp
3.650
6SHFLFDWLRQV
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections.
3-pole isolating device
(1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 6/20 to 6/23).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts
24
50/60 Hz B7
42
D7
48
E7
110
F7
220
M7
)RURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
10
Dimensions :
page 1/35
1/34
Schemes :
page 1/35
230
P7
240
U7
380
Q7
400
V7
415
N7
440
R7
Dimensions,
schemes

4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled
LC4 D09AD25A
98
LC4
b
c1
without cover or add-on blocks
with cover, without add-on blocks
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts)
with LA6 DK10
with LAD T, R, S
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover
50
33
110
173
63
79
D09AD18A
218
94
96
127
139
147
151
D25A
221
100
102
133
145
153
157
3
c1
55
71
86
LC4
c1
with LA6 DK10
with LAD T, R, S
D32A
100
102
133
145
153
157
36
110
124
LC4 D32A
88
c1
=
90
165
60
b1
100/110
LC4 D40D80
c
c1
G
a
c2
LC4
a
b
b1
c
c1
with LA1 DN (1 contact)
with LA6 DK
with LAD T, R, S
c2
G
D40D65
281
143
45
130
124
129
149
157
169
177
181
100
263
D80
311
143
48
140
135
140
160
168
180
188
192
178
293
Scheme
D.O.L. starters
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LC4 D09A to D80
- Q1
10
- KM1
References :
page 1/34
1/35
Presentation

Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
7
This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
mains voltage.
6
5
1
4
3
2
2
1
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
1
Speed
1 Starting in direct delta connection

2 Starting in star connection
The transition from star to delta

connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
on the machine speed (a characteristic
of centrifugal machines, for example).
Current
2,5
1
1,5
(1)
2
0,5
3
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
1
Speed

3 Resistive torque of the machine
Star-delta starting should be used for

motors starting on no-load or having a
low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
reduced to one third of the direct starting
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
torque.
- the starting current in star connection
is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
current.
All star-delta starters are supplied with a

special LAD S2 or LA2 KT2p time delay
relay which imposes a delay on the
delta contactor during the transition
period in order to allow the star
FRQWDFWRUVXIFLHQWEUHDNLQJWLPH
For ratings D115 and D150, this
function is performed by a time delay
auxiliary contact block LAD T2 and a
control relay.
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.

Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).
10
1/36
References
Star-delta starters for motor control

5.5 to 132 kW, (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled
Plate mounted starters

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
DF526460

of squirrel cage motors
Mains voltage delta connection
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
LC3 D32A
D32App
pp
Auxiliary contacts available

on each contactor
line
KM2
delta
KM3
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight
star
KM1
kW
4
kW
7.5
kW
7.5
kW
7.5
(3)
With
LC3 D09App
kg
1.530
5.5
11
11
11
(3)
With
LC3 D12App
1.530
11
18.5
22
22
(3)
With
LC3 D18App
1.730
15
25
30
30
(3)
With
LC3 D32App
2.030
18.5
37
37
37
(3)
Without
With
LC3 D40pp
LC3 D40ppA64
4.360
4.500
30
55
59
59
(3)
(3)
Without
With
LC3 D50pp
LC3 D50ppA64
4.360
4.500
37
75
75
75
(3)
(3)
Without
With
LC3 D80pp
LC3 D80ppA64
5.200
5.400
63
110
110
110
(3)
(3)
Without
LC3 D115pp (4)
11.800
With
LC3 D115ppA64 (4)
12.100
Without
LC3 D150pp (4)
12.100
With
LC3 D150ppA64 (4)
12.100
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
75
132
132
147
(3)
1 (3)
Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)

220/ 380/
230 V 400 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Auxiliary contacts
available on each contactor
line
KM2
delta
KM3
Weight
star
KM1
kg

3
5.5
5.5
5.5
With
LC3 K06pp
0.740
7.5
7.5
7.5
With
LC3 K09pp
0.740
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds

4
7.5
7.5
7.5
(3)
With
LC3 D090App
1.530
5.5
11
11
11
(3)
With
LC3 D120App
1.530
11
18.5
22
22
(3)
With
LC3 D180App
1.730
15
25
30
30
(3)
With
LC3 D320App
2.030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
0 to 6/23).
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/20
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts a 50/60 Hz
24
36
42
48
110
220
230
240
380
400
415
440
Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09
Code
B7
C7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Star-delta starters LC3 D09A...D150, LC3 D090AD320A

Code
B7
D7
E7
F7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
R7
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N FDQ DOVR EH WWHG VHH SDJH 5/79.
(4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115
5 or D150 without connectors.
Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43
Schemes :
page 1/43
1/37
10
KM2
3
a
1b
1c
5
KM1
KM3
KM1
KM3
KM2
8
1b
10
a
1/38
1c
1a
References
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or on mounting rail) (2)
Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds
Standard power
ratings of squirrel
cage motors (3)
Mains voltagedelta connection
400/
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
7.5
7.5
9
9
11
11
15
15
Thermal-magnetic
motor
circuit-breaker
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)
GV2 ME20
GV2 ME20
GV2 ME21
GV2 ME22
GV2 ME32
line
KM2
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D18pp
delta
KM3
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D18pp
star
KM1
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
Illustration
item no.
a
Reference
Separate component
Description
Mounting kit comprising:
power circuit connections and
1 time delay contact block LAD S2
Weight
kg
0.130
LAD 912GV
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

of squirrel cage motors (3)
Mains voltage - delta connection
220/
380/
230 V
400 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
4
5.5
11
15
18.5
30
37
63
75
7.5
11
18.5
25
37
55
75
110
132
7.5
11
22
30
37
59
75
110
132
7.5
11
22
30
37
59
75
110
147
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
by adding the voltage code) (4)
Separate
components
(see below)
line
KM2
delta
KM3
star
KM1
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D18pp (6)
LC1 D25pp (7)
LC1 D32pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D50pp
LC1 D80pp
LC1 D115pp
LC1 D150pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D25pp (7)
LC1 D32pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D50pp
LC1 D80pp
LC1 D115pp
LC1 D150pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D18pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D40pp
LC1 D50pp
LC1 D80pp
LC1 D115pp
Illustration
item no.
For components
type (5)
D09 and D12
Reference
LAD 91217
Weight
kg
0.180
D18 and D32
LAD 93217
0.310
D40 and D50
LA9 D5017
0.380
D80
LA9 D8017
0.680
D09, D12, D18

D32
D40 and D50
D80
LA9 D12974
LA9 D32974
LA9 D40973
LA9 D80973
0.150
0.180
0.300
0.300
Component
types
D09
D12
D18
D32
D40
D50
D80
D115 (5)
D150 (5)
Separate components
Description
Mounting kit comprising:
- 1 time delay contact block LAD S2
(D09D80) (3),
- power circuit connections (D09D80),
- VFUHZVDQGFODPSVIRU[LQJFRQWDFWRUV
to the plate (D40D80).
Equipment mounting plates
1a
1b
1c
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment.
(3) See comments on page 1/36.
(4) See page 5/62.
(5) For LC1 D115 and LC1 D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41.
(6) A LC1 D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D18 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
(7) A LC1 D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D25 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
10
Illustrations :
page 1/38
Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43
Schemes :
page 1/43
1/39
13
12
11
10
2
14
6
10
1/40
References (continued)
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or mounting rail) (2)
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Separate components (continued)
Description
Illustration For
item no.
use on
LC1
No. Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Instantaneous
auxiliary contact
blocks 1 N/O
Control relay
D115
(star)
LAD N10
0.020
D115, D150
CAD 32pp (3)
0.320
Time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Lead sealing kit
for time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker for
control circuit
(200415 V)
Set of 3
connectors for
wider terminations
(optional)
Set of power
connections with
[LQJDFFHVVRULHV
D115, D150
LAD T2
0.060
D115, D150
LA9 D901
0.005
D115, D150
GB2 CB05
0.060
D115, D150
LA9 FG980
0.200
D115
LA9 D11517
0.800
D150
LA9 D15017
1.050
Spare volt free

terminals
D115, D150
10
DZ3 HA3
0.007
10
DZ3 GA3
0.006
Lug-connector
terminal block
End stop
10
D115, D150
10
AB1 BC9535
0.236
11
D115, D150
100
AB1 AB8M35
0.005
Mounting rail
5 35 mm
Pre-slotted
mounting plate
Screw with
captive washer
12
D115, D150
10
AM1 ED021
0.210
13
D115, D150
AM3 PA65
1.950
14
D115, D150
12
100
AF1 VA618
0.006
100
AF1 VA410
0.002
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered
separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor
current, see pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the
equipment.
(3) See page 7/21.
10
Illustrations :
page 1/40
Dimensions :
pages 1/42 and 1/43
Schemes :
page 1/43
1/41
Dimensions

Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Star-delta starters
Plate mounted, pre-assembled
Pre-assembled:
KM1
110
KM3
KM2
110
LC3 D09AD32A
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 to D32
110
LC3 K
124
150
175
90
On starters LC3 D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper

part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm.
LC3
a
b
c
with LAD S
with LAD S and sealing cover
Pre-assembled: LC3 D40, D50

For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 or D50
Pre-assembled: LC3 D80

For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D80
D09A
143
26.5
139
143
D12A
143
26.5
139
143
D18A
144
26.5
139
143
D32A
165
32.5
145
149
60
143
45
47
60
100/110
143
175 (1)
263
183 (1)
281
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover
9
G
10
LC3 D115 or 3 x LC1 D with components
LC3 D150 or 3 x LC1 D with components
References :
pages 1/37 to 1/41
1/42
D115
D150
Schemes :
pages 1/43
293
311
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover

Pre-assembled: LC3 D115, D150
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D115 or D150
a
450
450
b
555
555
100/110
94
c
205
205
G
425
425
H
525
525
Dimensions (continued),
schemes
Star-delta starters
Dimensions (continued)
Star-delta starters (continued)

On mounting rail AM1 DP, pre-assembled
LC3 D090A D320A
2x7
KM1
KM3
KM2
D090A D180A
153
139
143
LC3
b
c
with LAD S
with LAD S and sealing cover
160
175
D320A
137
145
149
Schemes
LC3 D
KM3/5
95
KM3/5
14
13
13 22
KM2
21
KM1
KM2
21 67
KM1
KM3/1
KM3
A2
KM2
A2
KM1
A1
A1 22
A1 22
KM3
KM2
A2
A2
KM3
A2
A2
A1
A1
A1 16
A1
W2
V2
U2
KM2/1 (N)
KM1
KM2
68
55 14
22
21
KM1
A2
22
13 14
14
15
W1
V1
U1
W2
V2
KM3
U2
(2)
W1
V1
U1
KM1
54
53
(1)
KM2
13
KM1
KM3
KM2
21 56
5
6
21 96
3
4
O
96
1
2
95
L2
LC3 K
L3
L1
LC3 K, LC3 D09A to D80

LC3 D090A to D320A
Note: LC3 D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1.
95
67
153
172
68
55 183
171
KM1
KM2
13
A1 14
KM3
A2
A1
KA1
A2
KM2
KA1
A1154
KM2
A1 162
KM1
A2
F2
153
KM3
A2
5
6
3
4
KM1
161 56
W2
W1
U1
V1
V2
U2
Recommended
cabling for reversal
of motor rotation
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft
end).
KM2
KM1
14
184 154
13
W2
V2
U2
(2)
22
21 96
W1
2
U1
O
2
F1
F1
KM1
2
KM3
KM2
V1
L3
L2
L1
LC3 D115 and D150
(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
(2) Remote control.
References :
pages 1/37 to 1/41
1/43
10
Presentation

Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
mains voltage.
7
6
5
1
4
3
2
2
1
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
1
Speed

The transition from star to delta

connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
on the machine speed (a characteristic
of centrifugal machines, for example).
Current
2,5
1
1,5
(1)
2
0,5
3
0
0,25
0,50
0,75
Star-delta starting should be used for

motors starting on no-load or having a
low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
reduced to one third of the direct starting
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
torque.
- the starting current in star connection
is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
current.
Switching from star to delta connection

must be completed within a minimum
time.
This function is performed by a control
relay and a time delay auxiliary contact
block.
1
Speed

3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.
Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).
10
1/44
References
Star-delta starters for motor control,

90 to 375 kW (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled
Pre-assembled starters
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time:
LC3 Fppppp: 20 seconds,
LC3 FpppppA64: 30 seconds (3 identical contactors).
Composition of starters without mechanical interlock, see pages 1/47 and 1/49.
Star-delta starters
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
Auxiliary contacts available

on each contactor
line
KM2
delta
KM3
Star delta
mechanical
interlock
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Without
LC3 F185pp
kg
16.500
With
LC3 F185ppA64
16.625
Without
LC3 F225pp
16.500
With
LC3 F225ppA64
16.625
Without
LC3 F265pp
27.300
With
LC3 F265ppA64
27.425
Without
LC3 F330pp
37.000
With
LC3 F330ppA64
37.125
Without
LC3 F400pp
37.000
With
LC3 F400ppA64
37.125
Weight
(3)
511080
kW
90
100
110
LC3 FpppppA64
160
185
kW
160
200
220
280
315
kW
160
200
220
280
355
kW
185
220
250
315
375
star
KM1
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
Volts a 50/60 Hz
48
110
115
Code
E7
F7
FE7
2QHDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWEORFNW\SH/$'1FDQEHWWHG
220/230
M7
230
P7
240
U7
380/400
Q7
400
V7
415
N7
10
Presentation :
page 1/44
Dimensions :
page 1/50
Schemes :
page 1/51
1/45
1
*
3
7
1
7
KM1
KM3
KM2
6
7
*
*
10
See page 1/48
1/46
References

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)
Contactors
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)
Contactors (2)

220/
380/
230 V
400 V
415 V
kW
kW
kW
90
160
160
line
delta
star
Separate
components
(see below)
440 V
kW
185
KM2
LC1 F185pp
KM3
LC1 F185pp
KM1
LC1 D150pp
Component types
F185
100
200
200
220
LC1 F225pp
LC1 F225pp
LC1 F185pp
F225
110
220
220
250
LC1 F265pp
LC1 F265pp
LC1 F185pp
F265
160
280
280
315
LC1 F330pp
LC1 F330pp
LC1 F265pp
F330
185
315
355
375
LC1 F400pp
LC1 F400pp
LC1 F265pp
F400
Illustration For
item no.
use on
1
F185 to F400
No.
3
Sold in
lots of
1
Unit
reference
LAD N22
F185 to F400
CAD 32
0.580
F185 to F400
LAD T2
0.060
F185 to F400
LA9 D901
0.005
Thermal magnetic circuit5

breaker for 5 A control circuit
Sets of 3 connectors
6
for wider terminations
(optional)
F185 to F400
GB2 CB10
0.050
F185
LA9 FG980
0.200
F225 to F400
LA9 FJ980
0.490
Sets of power connections
F185
LA9 F18517
0.800
F225
LA9 F22510
1.400
F265
LA9 FH610
1.400
F330 and F400
LA9 FJ610
1.500
F185 to F400
LA7 Fppp (Selected according to size

of thermal overload relay) see pages 6/34
and 6/35.
Separate components (4)

Description
Instantaneous auxiliary
contact blocks
2 N/O + 2 N/C
Control relay
Time delay auxiliary
contact blocks
Sealing cover
Set of 3 busbars for

thermal overload
connections
Weight
kg
0.050
(2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code.
LC1 D150
Volts
48
110
115
120
220
230
240
380
400
415
50/60 Hz
E7
F7
FE7
G7
M7
P7
U7
Q7
V7
N7
LC1 F185 and F225
Volts
50 Hz (coil LX1)
60 Hz (coil LX1)
8
48
E5
E6
110
F5
F6
115
FE5
120
G6
220
M5
M6
LC1 F185 to F400

Volts
48
110
115
120
220
40 400 Hz (5)
E7 (6)
F7
FE7
G7
M7
Standard voltages, see page 5/114.
For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 5/130 to 5/139.
)RUORQJHUVWDUWLQJWLPHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
(4) Other separate components, see page 1/49.
(5) Coil LX1: LC1 F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225.
(6) Except for LC1 F400.
230
P5
240
U5
U6
380
Q5
Q6
400
V5
415
N5
230
P7
240
U7
380
Q7
400
V7
415
N7
10
Presentation :
page 1/44
Illustrations :
page 1/46
Dimensions :
page 1/50
Schemes :
page 1/51
1/47
14
12
10
17
1
15
3
*
9
*
*
KM1
KM3
KM2
6
*
*
7
16
13
* * *
17
11
10
See page 1/46
1/48

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)
Separate components (continued from page 1/47)
Description
Spare volt free terminals
Neutral terminals
with stop and spare
volt free terminal
(for control circuit)
Illustration
item no.
9
10
For
use on
F185
No.
3
Sold in
lots of
10
Unit
reference
DZ3 GA3
F225F400
10
DZ3 HA3
0.007
F185
10
AB1 BC9535
0.236
100
AB1 AB8P35
0.006
10
DZ3 HA3
0.007
10
AB1 BC15035
0.277
100
AB1 AB8M35
0.007
10
DZ3 JA3
0.010
10
AB1 BC24035
0.287
100
AB1 AB8M35
0.007
10
DZ3 JA3
0.010
F225 and F265
F330 and F400
Weight
kg
0.006
Reducer bracket
11
F400
LA9 F100
0.100
Mounting rails (2)
12
F185F400
10
AM1 DE200
0.900
13
F185F400
AM1 EC200
2.980
Uprights (2)
14
F115F400
AM1 EC200
2.980
1/4 turn sliding clip nuts

and corresponding bolts
for rails AM1 DE
15
F185F400
10
AF1 CD061
0.020
100
AF1 VA618
0.006

for rails AM1 DE
16
10
AF1 CD081
0.020
10
AF1 VC820
0.024

IRUHTXLSPHQW[LQJ
17
10
AF1 CD061
0.020
100
AF1 VA618
0.006
10
AF1 CD061
0.020
10
AF1 CD081
0.020
100
AF1 VA618
0.006
10
AF1 VC820
0.024
25 x H6 screws with washers
F185F225
ACM GV763
19.090
F265
ACM GV973
33.310
F330 and F400
ACM GV1084
54.000
AE3 FX122
F185F400
F185F330
15
F400
Enclosures:
metal, grey RAL 7032
Fixing lugs
adjustable for enclosure ACM
0.080
(2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.
10
Presentation :
page 1/44
Illustrations :
page 1/48
Dimensions :
page 1/50
Schemes :
page 1/51
1/49
Dimensions

Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Chassis mounted starters

Pre-assembled: LC3 F185 to LC3 F400
For customer assembly: 2 x LC1 Fppp and 1 x LC1 D150 or 3 x LC1 Fppp
G
F1 F2
KM2
KM3
KM1
K2
K3
K4
K1
4
c
a
565
b
675
c
235
G
525
H
625
K
160
K1
110
K2
80
K3
110
K4
80
565
675
235
525
625
160
110
80
110
80
LC3 F265 or 3 x LC1 Fppp with components F265
665
775
266
625
725
165
110
100
110
110
765
975
276
725
825
195
140
100
110
180
765
975
276
725
925
195
140
100
180
110
LC3 F185 or 2 x LC1 Fppp + 1 x LC1 D

with components F185
10
Presentation:
page 1/44
1/50
References:
pages 1/47 and 1/49
Schemes
Star-delta starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
W1
2
1
2
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation

(standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
5
6
W2
U2
KM1
W1
W2
V1
V2
U1
U2
KM3
V1
L3
KM2
V2
L2
3
U1
L1
1
LC3 F185 to F400
4
F1
95
21
96
F1
67
KM2
68
154
KM1
172
184
14
153
13 22
Remote
control
KM1
7
KA1
54
61
KM2
14
56
53
KM2
13
55
171
183
KM1
KM3
A1
A1
KM3
A2
KA1
A2
KM2
A2
KM1
A2
F2
A1
A1
62
10
Presentation:
page 1/44
References:
pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
1/51
Presentation
107983
Presentation
The TeSys U starter-controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following
functions:
b Protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors:
v isolation and breaking function,
v overload and short-circuit protection,
v thermal overload protection,
v power switching.
b Control of the application:
v protection function alarms, application monitoring (running time, number of faults,
motor current values, ...),
v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values).
These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which
simply clip into the power base.
This late customisation is even possible after power and control circuit wiring has
been completed.
3
TeSys U starter-controller
7H6\V8LVDH[LEOHUDQJHWKDWPHHWVWKHFXUUHQWDQGIXWXUHQHHGVRIV\VWHP
builders, panel builders and machine manufacturers, as well as those of additional
systems.
)URPGHVLJQWKURXJKWRRSHUDWLRQ7H6\V8RIIHUVPDQ\DGYDQWDJHVDQGVLPSOLHV
the selection of components in comparison with a traditional solution.
- WKHEUHDNLQJLVRODWLRQDQGFRQWDFWRUIXQFWLRQVDUHLQFRUSRUDWHGLQDVLQJOHEORFN
this means fewer references to be ordered and easy selection without any risk of
error, because a single reference covers all needs up to 15 Kw.
- the control unit has a wide setting range. It can operate on a d.c. or a.c. supply.
The number of references required is divided by 10, compared with traditional
solutions.
5
538849
The compact components in the TeSys U range are mounted on a single rail, so
optimising the amount of space required in enclosures. By eliminating power wiring
between the circuit-breaker and contactor, TeSys U reduces installation times in
enclosures.
Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components
and eliminate the risk of errors.
Starter-controller
Consists of a power base and a control unit.
Power bases 1
The power base is independent of the control voltage.
It is available from 0 to 15 kW at 400 V.
It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400V, total
coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function.
b 2 ratings are available: 012 A and 032 A.
b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B).
Control units 2
These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to
be protected and the type of protection required.
b Standard control unit (LUCA)VDWLVHVWKHEDVLFSURWHFWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWVIRU
motor starters: overload and short-circuit.
b Magnetic control unit (LUCL)ZKHQWWHGXSVWUHDPRIDYDULDEOHVSHHGGULYHRU
soft start-soft stop unit and used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power
base, this unit provides isolation and short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced
functions such as alarm, fault differentiation,...
b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control
and protection requirements.
The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools.
They have a wide range of adjustment (range of 4) and low heat dissipation, due to
the fact that bimetallic overload protection components are no longer used.
10
(1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
1/52
Presentation (continued)

Control options
538852
Function modules can be used to increase the functions of the starter-controller.

Function modules 3
Must be used in conjunction with advanced control units.
4 types are available:
b Thermal overload alarm (LUF W10).
b Thermal fault and manual reset (LUF DH11).
b Thermal fault and automatic or remote reset (LUF DA01 and LUF DA10).
b Indication of motor load (LUF V2), which can also be used in conjunction with the
multifunction control unit.
All alarm and fault information processed by these modules is available on digital
contacts.
3
Communication modules 3
The information processed is exchanged:
b Via a parallel bus:
v parallel wiring module (LUF C00).
538850
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
Via a serial bus:

AS-Interface modules (ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51),
3UREXV'3PRGXOH/8/&
CANopen module (LUL C08),
DeviceNet module (LUL C09),
Advantys STB module (LUL C15).
Modbus modules (LUL C031 and LUL C033).
They must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit and require a

c 24 V supply voltage.
Connection to other protocols, such as Fipio, is possible via gateway modules
(LUFP) or via the TeSysPort for Ethernet.
Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN) 3

SRVVLEOHFRQJXUDWLRQV12121&RU1&
4
Auxiliary contacts 4
They provide the following information: fault signalling and rotary knob in "ready"
position.
538851
Power options
Reverser block 5
Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation.
The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without
modifying the width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block (LU6M) is mounted
separately from the power base when the height available is limited.
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB
This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be
increased up to 130 kA at 400 V, with a visible break.
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks 6
The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared
away from the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring.
7
Control circuit pre-wiring system 7

Numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections, e.g.
connection of reverser control terminals, ...
6
10
1/53

Structure of a motor starter
Mirror auxiliary contacts built-in

as standard, mechanically
linked to the power poles
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Coil cut-out contact built into

the handle as standard
Disconnection and breaking
A2
A1
6/T3
22/NC
21/NC
14/NO
Low consumption
technology coil
5/L3
1/L1
2/T1
Power switching
4/T2
Control unit
Overload protection
3/L2
13/NO
Short-ciircuit protection
3
6/T3
Reverser
Motor starter structure
4/T2
2/T1
Control unit
Pre-wiring
Disconnection and breaking

Short-ciircuit protection
Power switching
Variable speed
controller
Variable speed control
In
Understanding the commercial references through a comparison with a traditional motor starter
7
12 Amp
category AC3
Nonreversing
Contactor
family
Coil voltage :
110 V 50/60 Hz
TeSys D
Circuitbreaker
family
Auxiliary contact (for cut-out of contactor coil)
Startercontroller
family
1/54
TeSys D
Power combination block
Wide range
control unit
Standard
Power base
10
For ratings
up to 12 A
Rating
Size of product 2
(45 mm wide)
Startercontroller
family
Control voltage
e.g.. : 110240 V
AC/DC
Rating
e.g.. : 312 A
82
81
84
A2
B1
A1
A3
B3
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
Reverser

Selection
CONTROL UNIT
POWER BASE
2
For D.O.L. starting
non-reversing
Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz
Setting range
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts built-in as standard.

For D.O.L. starting
reversing
Reference to be completed by adding the voltage code
Reference to be completed by
adding the voltage code
Control circuit voltages (V)
or
Reference
Rating
5
Auxiliary contacts
6
Auxiliary contacts
Number of contacts
Auxiliary contacts
Power pole status
References
Signalling contacts
Signalling contacts
Power base
Number of contacts
Fault signalling
Position of rotary knob
Removable terminal
block
9
References
10
1/55

Standard control unit
Magnetic control unit
1
LUCL
For use with a

variable speed
controller or a soft
start-soft stop unit
LUCA
Class 10 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
b Protection against overloads and shortcircuits.

b Protection against phase failure and
phase imbalance.
b Earth fault protection (equipment
protection only).
b Manual reset.
(see page 1/134)
b Short-circuit protection
b Manual Reset
Motor thermal overload protection must
be provided by the variable speed
controller or soft starter.
4
1
2
3
Power base
LUB or LU2B
Thermal overload signalling

module and manual reset
LUF DH11
(see page 1/71)
Thermal overload signalling

modules and automatic or
remote reset
LUF DA01 and LUF DA10
(see page 1/71)
Thermal overload alarm

module
LUF W10
(see page 1/71)
Motor load indication module

LUF V2
(see page 1/71)
Auxiliary contact modules

LUF Npp
(see page 1/65)
Parallel wiring module

LUF C00
(see page 1/76)
8
3
Fault signalling contacts

LUA1pp 'HSHQGLQJRQFRQJXUDWLRQ
(see page 1/65)
10
Note: the colour indicates possible combinations with the selected control unit.
Example: function module LUF DH11 can only be used with an advanced control unit.
1/56
Advanced control unit
Multifunction control unit
LUCB
Class 10 - 3-phase
LUCC
Class 10 - single-phase
b
b
v
v
v
v
LUCD
LUCM
Class 20 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
Classes 5 to 30 - single-phase and 3-phase

(see page 1/70)
Same functions as the standard control unit

In addition, in conjunction with a function module:
fault differentiation with manual reset,
fault differentiation with remote or automatic reset,
thermal overload alarm,
indication of motor load.
b Same functions as the standard control unit

b In addition, reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic.
b Protection function alarm.
b Indication on front panel or on remote terminal via Modbus RS
485 port.
b /RJIXQFWLRQ
b 0RQLWRULQJIXQFWLRQLQGLFDWLRQRIPDLQPRWRUSDUDPHWHUVRQ
front panel of the control unit, or via a remote terminal
b Differentiation of thermal overload and magnetic fault.
b Overload, no-load running.
5
2
AS-Interface
communication modules (1)
ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
(see page 1/78)
3UREXV'3
communication module (1)
LUL C07
(see page 1/80)
CANopen
LUL C08
(see page 1/84)
DeviceNet
LUL C09
(see page 1/86)
Advantys STB
LUL C15
(see page 1/90)
7
Modbus
communication modules (1)
LUL C031 and LUL C033
(see page 1/92)
10
(1) Communication modules can only be combined with a c 24 V control unit (LUCp pp BL).
1/57
Application examples
525971
Application
Starting and protection of a pump.
Operating conditions
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
Power: 4 kW at 400 V.
In: 9 A.
Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour.
Duty class S3.
3-wire control:
Start button (S2),
Stop button (S1),
Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.
Products used
Description
Power base
12 A with screw clamp connections
Item
1
Quantity Reference
1
LUB 12
LUCA 12FU
Page
1/62
1/69
Functions performed
510901
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.

b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of
service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact.
b ,QWHUORFNEHWZHHQWKHPRWRUVWDUWHUFRQWURODQGWKHSRVLWLRQRIWKHURWDU\NQREQRW
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
4
1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Scheme
230 V
13
14
C.U.
10
1/58
A1
6/T3
A2
4/T2
M
3
W1
V1
U1
2/T1
510902
Application
Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation.
Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in
order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to
thermal overload.
Additional products used

Description
Item
Page
Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal
overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit
Alarm function module
2
3
1
1
LUCB 12FU
LUF W10
1/69
1/71
Functions performed
b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by
the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable.
b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Scheme
230 V
13
A1
LUF W10
07
Alarms Module
08
To
application
A2
4/T2
6/T3
W1
V1
2/T1
14
C.U.
U1
Quantity Reference
M
3
7
Other versions
The advanced control unit can provide other functions,

depending on the type of function modules used (instead of
the LUF W module described above):
- thermal fault signalling with function modules LUF DA01,
LUF DA10 or LUF DH11,
- indication of motor load with function module LUF V2. This
module delivers a 4-20 mA analogue signal, which is
proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the
motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and
provides access to other application functions using this
value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance
possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks
down).
10
1/59
520971
Application
Manual control of a 2-position turntable.
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
b
Products used
Description
Power base, reversing,
12 A with screw clamp connections
523761
Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V.

In: 6 A.
30 starts per hour
Duty class S4.
3-wire control:
Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1),
Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2),
Stop button (S5),
Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4.
Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.
Item
1
Quantity Reference
1
LU2B 12FU
Page
1/63
LUCA 12FU
1/69
Functions performed
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9M R1C included on
base LU2B 12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical
interlocking unnecessary.
V1
M
3
10
1/60
6/T3
W1
U1
2/T1
4/T2
C.U.
115 V
A2
A1
Reverser Motor Controller
B3
A3
LU2B
B1
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
Scheme (manual control)
520969
Application
Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid dry
running, which could lead to destruction of the pump.
b
b
b
b
b
Power: 15 kW at 400 V.
In: 28.5 A.
Duty class S1.
Control circuit voltage: c 24 V.
Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Products used
510903
Description
Power base 32 A without connections
Multifunction control unit
Modbus communication module
Pre-wired coil connection
Connection of communication module
output terminals to the coil terminals
Connection cable for connecting the
communication module to the serial bus
T-junction
Item
1
2
3
4
Quantity
1
1
1
1
Reference
LUB 320
LUCM 32BL
LUL C033
LU9B N11C
Page
1/62
1/70
1/93
1/93
VW3 A8 306 Rpp
1/93
VW3 A8 306 TF03
1/93
Functions performed
b Load switching (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction
control unit.
b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following
parameters must be entered:
v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s),
v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
FXUUHQW,IWKHUDWLRUHPDLQVEHORZWKLVWKUHVKROGIRUWKHWLPHVSHFLHGLQWKHSUHYLRXV
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %).
b Indication of the various motor starter statuses and currents.
3
4
LUL C033
24 V 24 V
c Aux COM
D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil
Modbus Module
LO1
LI1
LI2
D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
5/L3
Multifunction
Control Unit
4 5 8
4 5 8
C.U.
8
+
W1 6/T3
Status (Register 455)

Ready (available)
Poles closed
Fault
Alarms
Tripped
Reserved reset enabled
A1-A2 powered
Motor running
Motor current % (bit 0)
Reserved
Motor starting
V1 4/T2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
LUCM
24 V Aux
U1 2/T1
0RGEXVSUROH,(&
Commands (Register 704)
Forward running
Reverse running
Reserved
Reset
Reserved
Connection test
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved 3-phase control
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
3/L2
1/L1
Schemes
M
3
24 V
Modbus
VW3 A8 306 TF03
Other functions
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions,
such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm,
0RGXOH/8/&DOVRSURYLGHVDSURJUDPPDEOHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOH
discrete inputs.
1/61
10
References
7ZRYHUVLRQVRIFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQFRQJXUDWLRQDUHDYDLODEOH
b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted
by the customer.
561330
520739
Non-reversing power bases
Power bases for non-reversing D.O.L. starting (1)

Connection
Power
Control
Item
(2)
Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A
Reference
Weight
690 V
A
kg
These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O (13-14) and 1 N/C (21-22) which
indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
LUB p2
A low power internal contact allows power supply to the control unit to be switched off
when the rotary knob is no longer in the ON position.
LUB p20
The power bases must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 1/68 to 1/70
510904
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw
clamp
terminals
1+2+3
+4
Without
1+2
connections
1
2
12
12
LUB 12
0.900
32
23
21
LUB 32
0.900
12
12
LUB 120
0.865
32
23
21
LUB 320
0.865
Terminal block for power bases without connections

Connection
Screw clamp terminals
3
LUB p2
10
1/62
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
LUB 120 or 320
Item
(2)
3+4
Reference
LU9B N11
Weight
kg
0.045
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below.
For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/66
Volts
230
440
500
690 (3)
kA
50
50
10
4
(2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Other versions
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98
For base
Schemes:
pages 1/112 to 1/119
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device

(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate
fuses).
References
561270
Reversing power bases
7ZRYHUVLRQVRIFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQFRQJXUDWLRQDUHDYDLODEOH
b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories).
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, pre-assembled

Connection
Power
Control
Item
(1)
Rating
y 440 V 500 V
A
A
690 V
A
Reference, to
be completed) (2)
Weight
kg
These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate nonreversing and reversing operating status.
Screw
clamp
terminals
Screw
clamp
terminals
Without
connections
1 + 2 + 3 12
+4+5
32
12
23
9
21
LU2B 12pp
LU2B 32pp
1.270
1.270
1 + 2 + 3 12
+5
32
12
23
9
21
LU2B A0pp
LU2B B0pp
1.270
1.250
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting

A reverser block should preferably be combined with a non-reversing power base
without connections to create a reversing starter-controller.
The built-in N/O (13-14) and N/C (21-22) contacts are used for electrical interlocking
EHWZHHQWKHUHYHUVHUEORFNDQGWKHEDVHWKH\DUHWKHUHIRUHQRORQJHUDYDLODEOHDV
output contacts.
The reverser block has two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate
non-reversing and reversing operating status.
510905
LU2B p2
32 A reverser block
Connection
Power
For mounting directly
Screw clamp
beneath the power base terminals
For mounting separately Screw clamp
from the base
terminals
VFUHZRUUDLO[LQJ
Item (1)
Control
3
Without
connections
6
Without
connections
Reference, to
be completed) (2)
Weight
kg
LU2M B0pp
0.400
LU6M B0pp
0.425
Accessories
Description Item
Control
terminal
block
3
7
Application
Reference
Reversing power base without

LU9 M1
connections LU2B A0pp or B0pp
Reverser block LU2M B0pp
LU9 M1
for direct mounting beneath power base
LU9 M1
for mounting separately from power base
LU9M R1
for mounting separately from power base
Weight
kg
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.030
Control circuit pre-wiring components

Description
Weight
kg
5
LU9M R1C
0.035
Pre-wired connector (3)
(1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
(2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit.
Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts
24
4872
110240
c
BL
a
B
c or a
ES (4)
FU (5)
(3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
510906
LU2B p2
Other versions
7
Item
Reference
Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device

(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses).
10
LU6M + LU9 M1 + LU9M R1
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 to 1/98
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
1/63
Presentation

Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
Contact states depending on the product status

Position
of rotary
knob
Indication N/O pole

on front
contact
panel
N/C pole
contact
N/O
contact
any fault
N/C ontact
any fault
LUF N11
31-32
LUA1 C20
97-98
LUA1 C11
95-96
or
LUF N02
31-32
41-42
LUA1 C200 LUA1 C110

No terminal No terminal
block
block
LUA1 C200
No terminal
block
or
LUF N20
33-34
43-44
LUB9 N11
21-22
LUA1 C11
17-18
or
LUF N11
43-44
LUA1 C110
No terminal
block
or
LUB9 N11
13-14
1
References of add-on contact blocks
and auxiliary contact modules
Terminal referencing
Off
OFF
Ready to operate
Start
Tripped on short-circuit
Tripped on
thermal overload
Manual reset mode
TRIP
Remote reset mode
10
1/64
I>>
Automatic reset on thermal

overload fault mode
Characteristics:
page 1/98
TRIP
Schemes:
page 1/112
N/O contact
in closed position.
N/C contact
in open position.
N/O contact
product
ready
LUA1 C20
17-18
References

568764
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
References
Auxiliary contacts
Signalling and composition
4
6
1
2
5
Cabling
Item
Reference
Weight
kg
0.030
1 N/C fault signalling

contact (95-96) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position
Screw clamp
terminals
1+2
LUA1 C11
Without
connections
LUA1 C110
0.012
1 N/O fault signalling

contact (97-98) and
1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob
in ready position
Screw clamp
terminals
1+2
LUA1 C20
0.030
Without
connections
LUA1 C200
0.012
2 N/O contacts
Contacts open, rotary knob
in OFF position
Contacts closed, rotary knob
in ready position
Screw clamp
terminals
LUA8 E20
0.048
LUB + LUA1 + LUF N + LUA 8E20
Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals

Module with 2 contacts indicating the status of the starter-controller power poles
Operation: a or c 24250 V, I th: 5 A
Composition
Item
Reference
2 N/O contacts (33-34 and 43-44)
LUF N20
Weight
kg
0.050
1 N/C contact (31-32) and 1 N/O contact (43-44)
LUF N11
0.050
2 N/C contacts (31-32 and 41-42)
LUF N02
0.050
Item
Reference
Screw clamp
LUA1 C110
terminal blocks
LU9B C11
Weight
kg
0.022
LUA1 C200
LU9B C20
0.022
Location for auxiliary contact,

communication or
function module
Location for add-on
contact blocks
LU9C 1
0.020
LU9C 2
0.010
Accessories
Description
Blanking
covers
For use on
10
Characteristics:
page 1/98
Schemes:
page 1/112
1/65
References

Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and
accessories
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A
Description
4 1
Application
Pitch
mm
45
54
Item
2
Sold in
lots of
1
1
Unit
reference
GV2 G245
GV2 G254
Weight
kg
0.036
0.038
3 tap-offs
45
54
1
1
GV2 G345
GV2 G354
0.058
0.060
4 tap-offs
45
54
1
1
GV2 G445
GV2 G454
0.77
0.085
5 tap-offs
54
GV2 G554
0.100
GV1 G10
0.005
GV1 G09
0.040
2
Sets of 3-pole
63 A busbars
2 tap-offs
Protective
end cover
For unused
busbar outlets
Terminal block for Connection

supply to one or from the top
more busbar sets
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A

The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support.
Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common

Number of
tap-offs at
18 mm intervals
18
Item
Length
For mounting in
enclosure width
mm
452
mm
800
Reference
AK5 JB144
Weight
kg
0.900
5
Removable 3-phase power sockets
Number of
points used
on the busbar
system
2
Thermal
current
Item
Cable
lengths
Sold in Unit
lots of reference
16
200
AK5 PC13 (1)
kg
0.040
32
250
AK5 PC33 (1)
0.045
1000
AK5 PC33L (1)
0.060
Weight
Limiter blocks and accessories

Application
Limiterdisconnector
(3) (5)
Current limiter
(3)
Limiter cartridge
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
1/66
Breaking
Mounting
capacity Iq
y 440 V 690 V
kA
kA
130
70
Direct on
power base
Unit
reference
LUA LB1 (2)
kg
0.310
100
35
Separate
LA9 LB920
0.320
130
70
Limiter-disconnector LUA LF1
7+9
Weight
0.135
LAD 90 (4)
On power base,
0.001
on reverser block,
on parallel link
splitter box
The rated peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA.
When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current
must not exceed 7 kA.
Supplied with limiter cartridge.
These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base.
Sold in lots of 100.
The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not
be common to several motor starters.
Clip-in
marker holder
(1)
Item

568768
Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and

accessories
Phase barrier
Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used:

b To build a UL 508 type E FHUWLHGVWDUWHU6HOI3URWHFWHG6WDUWHU
:LWKRXWWKHSKDVHEDUULHUWKHVWDUWHUFRQWUROOHULVFHUWLHG8/
b If the starter-controller is to be used on an operational voltage of 690 V.
Description
568769
Phase barrier
Item
Application
Mounting Reference
LUB or LU2B 12 or 120

LUB or LU2B 32 or 320
LUA LB1
Direct on LU9 SP0

terminals
L1, L2, L3
1
Weight
kg
0.030
Door interlock mechanisms

Description
LU9 AP00
Weight
kg
0.490
Door-mounted black handle on blue front plate, IP54 4
LU9 AP11
0.150
Door-mounted red handle on yellow front plate, IP54 4
LU9 AP12
0.150
Fixing kit (1) (2)
Reference
2+3
568771
Item
5
Handle for mounting in the MCC drawer
(Motor Control Centre)
LU9 AP20
0.096
7KH[LQJNLWLQFOXGHVDEUDFNHWDQGDVKDIWH[WHQVLRQPD[LPXPGHSWKPP
7RXVHWKH[LQJNLWZLWKD'2/UHYHUVLQJSRZHUEDVHRQO\UHYHUVHUEORFN/80PXVWEH
used.
568770
RESET
TEST
10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
1/67
Selection

Control units
Operating characteristics
Control units
Standard
LUCA
Thermal overload protection

Overcurrent protection
LUCD
14.2 x the setting current
Short-circuit protection
Protection against phase loss
Advanced
LUCB
LUCC
Multifunction
LUCM
3 to 17 x the setting current
14.2 x the max. current
Protection against phase imbalance

Earth fault protection
(equipment protection only)
Tripping class
Motor type
10
3-phase
10
20
Single-phase 3-phase
530
Single-phase and 3-phase
Thermal overload test function

Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting time
Reset method
Manual
Automatic or remote
With function module, or parameters

can be set via the bus with a
communication module, see chart
below.
4
Alarm
Thermal overload alarm only with

function module or communication
module, see below.
5
Log function
Monitoring function

Thermal overload signalling and manual reset
With module LUF W

With module LUF DH11
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset
With modules LUF DA01 and

LUF DA10
With module LUF V
Parameters can be set

Parameters can be set via the bus with
a communication module (see below).
Possible for each type of fault.
Indication on front panel of the control
unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via
PDA (1).
With communication modules to make
use of these alarms via a bus, see
below.
Log of the last 5 trips.
Number of starts, number of trips,
number of operating hours.
Display of main motor parameters on

front panel of the control unit, via
remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).
With function modules (2)
Indication of motor load (analogue)
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Reset method
Alarm
Remote reset via the bus
Indication of motor load
With any communication module

Parameters can be set via the bus
With modules LUL C031, LUL C033,
LUL C15, LUL C07, LUL C08 and
LUL C09 (thermal overload alarm only).
Fault signalling and differentiation

Remote programming and monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Built-in function
10
(1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant.

(2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module.
1/68
With module LUL C031, LUL C033,

LUL C09
and Modbus port on the control unit
(alarm possible for all types of fault).
With modules LUL C031, LUL C033,

LUL C09
and Modbus port on the control unit.
Function provided with accessory
References

510913
Standard and advanced control units
Description
1
5
2
1
2
3
4
5
Extraction and locking handle

Test button (on advanced control unit only)
Ir adjustment dial
Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover
Sealing of locking handle
Standard control units

Maximum standard power
ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
400/440 V 500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
Setting
range
Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
Reference, to
be completed
by adding the
voltage code (1)
Weight
2
kg
Class 10 for 3-phase motors
0.09
0.25
1.5
5.5
7.5
15
520735
LUCA pppp
LUCB pppp
2.2
5.5
9
15
3
9
15
18.5
LUCA X6pp
LUCA 1Xpp
LUCA 05pp
LUCA 12pp
LUCA 18pp
LUCA 32pp
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
Advanced control units

Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload.

0.09
0.25
1.5
5.5
7.5
15
2.2
5.5
9
15
3
9
15
18.5
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
LUCB X6pp
LUCB 1Xpp
LUCB 05pp
LUCB 12pp
LUCB 18pp
LUCB 32pp
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
LUCC X6pp
LUCC 1Xpp
LUCC 05pp
LUCC 12pp
LUCC 18pp
LUCC 32pp
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
32
32
LUCD X6pp
LUCD 1Xpp
LUCD 05pp
LUCD 12pp
LUCD 18pp
LUCD 32pp
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
0.140
Class 10 for single-phase motors
0.09
0.55
2.2
4
7.5
520736
LUB p2 + LUCA pppp

0.09
0.25
1.5
5.5
7.5
15
2.2
5.5
9
15
3
9
15
18.5

Volts
24
4872
110240
c
BL (2), (3)
a
B
c or a
ES (4)
FU (5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(4) c : 4872 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110220 V, a : 110...240 V.
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/99
Schemes:
page 1/113
1/69
References

510914
Multifunction control units
Description
6
1
2
3
LUCMppBL
1
2
3
4
5
6

Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters)
4-button keypad
c 24 V auxiliary power supply
Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector.
The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow:

b LQFRQJXUDWLRQPRGHORFDOFRQJXUDWLRQRISURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQVDQGDODUPV
b in run mode: display of parameter values and events.
The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect:
b an operator terminal,
b a PC,
b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
Multifunction control units
3
520737
Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried
out:
b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad,
b or via an operator terminal,
b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software,
b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus.
Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power
supply.
LUB p2 + LUCM ppBL
Maximum standard power

ratings of 3-phase motors
50/60 Hz
400/415 V 500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
0.09
0.25
3
1.5
2.2
Setting
range
Clip-in
mounting on
power base
Rating
A
0.150.6
0.351.4
1.255
A
12 and 32
12 and 32
12 and 32
LUCM X6BL
LUCM 1XBL
LUCM 05BL
kg
0.175
0.175
0.175
5.5
7.5
15
312
4.518
832
12 and 32
32
32
LUCM 12BL
LUCM 18BL
LUCM 32BL
0.175
0.175
0.175
5.5
9
15
9
15
18.5
On CD-Rom
Language
Reference
Multi-language (3)
LU9 CD1
Weight
kg
0.022
HMI terminal
521335
This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit
/8&0WREHUHDGDQGPRGLHG
,WLVVXSSOLHGSUHFRQJXUHGWRSURYLGHGLDORJXHZLWK7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUV
(Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded).
Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language
Weight
TeSys U users manual (2)

Application
Reference
(1)
Multi-language (3)
XBT NU400
Display window
Supply voltage
Reference
4 lines of
20 characters
c 24 V
XBT NU400
Length
Type
Reference
2.5 m
SUB-D 25-way
female - RJ45
XBT Z938
Weight
kg
0.150
Connecting cable (4)

Function
Connects terminal XBT NU400
to a multifunction control unit.
Weight
kg
0.200
(1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of 10 %.

(2) The CD-Rom contains users manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
(4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub
or to T-junctions (see page 1/93).
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/99
1/70
Schemes:
pages 1/112 to 1/115
References

Function modules
Function modules
Output
Item
Application
Reference
Weight
kg
510915
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset

Module LUF DH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and shortcircuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1 C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well
as an LED on the front panel.
To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base.
The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an a/c
24240 V external power supply.
4
1 N/O + 1 N/C
a or c 24250 V
LUF DH11
0.060
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset

These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit
faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1 C).
The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED
on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with
terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring
allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then
VWD\LQWKHUHDG\SRVLWLRQ .
Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if
terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free
contact connected to terminals X1-X2.
These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c
24240 V external power supply.
510445
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp

+
LUFW 10 or LUF Vp
Note: Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply.
)RUUHPRWHUHVHWWLQJXVHDYROWIUHHFRQWDFWVSHFLFWRHDFKPRGXOHWREHUHVHW
1 N/C
1 N/O
4
4
a or c 24250 V
a or c 24250 V
LUF DA01
LUF DA10
0.055
0.055

Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in
operation due to overload tripping.
Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state
exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %).
Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by
an N/O relay output.
It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.
%
200
100
1
2
3
1 N/O
1 2.2 kW
2 4 kW
3 7.5 kW
12 mA
20 mA
a or c 24250 V
LUF W10
0.055

This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status
(I average/Ir).
b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases,
b Ir = value of the setting current.
The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 % (0 to
300 % for a single-phase load).
It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit.
Module LUF V2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA
LUF V2
0.050
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/96 and 1/101
Schemes:
page 1/114
1/71
Presentation,
functions
PowerSuite software workshop
Presentation
534513
The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting
up the Schneider Electric control device motors:
b TeSys U starter-controllers
b TeSys T motor management systems
b Altistart soft start/soft stop units
b Altivar variable speed drives
b Lexium 05 servo drives
It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as:

b 3UHSDULQJFRQJXUDWLRQV
b Start-up
b Maintenance
To facilitate start-up and maintenance, the PowerSuite software workshop is
compatible with the Bluetooth wireless link.
PowerSuite screen on PC
The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert an Altivar 58 or

$OWLYDU)GULYHFRQJXUDWLRQLQWRRQHWKDWLVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKDQ$OWLYDU
533181
Start-up
When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
used to:
b 7UDQVIHUWKHJHQHUDWHGFRQJXUDWLRQ
b Adjust
b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as:
v The oscilloscope
v The high-speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms)
v The FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) oscilloscope
v Display of communication parameters
b Control
b 6DYHWKHQDOFRQJXUDWLRQ
6
PowerSuite screen on PC
View of PI regulator function parameters
Maintenance
To facilitate maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
used to:
b &RPSDUHWKHFRQJXUDWLRQRIDGHYLFHFXUUHQWO\EHLQJXVHGZLWKDVDYHG
FRQJXUDWLRQ
b Manage the users installed equipment base, in particular:
v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery,
workshops, etc.)
v Store maintenance messages
v Facilitate Modbus TCP connection by storing the IP address
User interface
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to:
b Present the device parameters (arranged by function) in the form of illustrated
views of diagrams or simple tables
b Customize the parameter names
b Create:
v A user menu (choice of particular parameters)
v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges, bar charts)
b Perform sort operations on the parameters
b 'LVSOD\WH[WLQYHODQJXDJHV(QJOLVK)UHQFK*HUPDQ,WDOLDQDQG6SDQLVK7KH
language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program.
572706
Functions (1)
3UHSDULQJFRQJXUDWLRQV
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device
FRQJXUDWLRQZKLFKFDQEHVDYHGSULQWHGDQGH[SRUWHGWRRIFHDXWRPDWLRQ
software.
It also features online contextual help:

b On the PowerSuite tool
b On the device functions by direct access to the user manuals
10
View of the FTT oscilloscope
References:
page 1/74
1/72
(1) Certain functions are not available for all devices. See the table of available functions,
page 1/73.
Functions (continued)
Functions available for the PowerSuite software workshop

Functions not listed in the table are available for all devices.
Function available with devices
Controller
Startercontroller
Soft start/
soft stop
unit
Drives
TeSys T
TeSys U
ATS 48
ATV 11 ATV 31
Servo
drive
ATV 61
ATV 71
LXM 05
Monitoring
Oscilloscope
High-speed oscilloscope
FFT oscilloscope
Display of communication parameters
Control
Customization of parameter names
Creation of a user menu
Creation of monitoring control panels
Sort operation on parameters

Custom logic editor
Functions available
Functions not available
536845
Connections (1)
Modbus serial link
The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal
port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC.
PowerSuite
Two types of connection are possible:

b With a single device (point-to-point connection), use a VW3 A8 106 PC serial port
connection kit.
b With a number of devices (multidrop connection), use the XGS Z24 interface.
RS 232
XGS Z24
RS 485
Modbus serial link
ATV 31 or
Lexium 05
ATV 61
ATV 71
TeSys U
ATS 48
536846
PowerSuite
Modbus TCP network
Modbus TCP communication network

The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected to a Modbus TCP network.
In this case, the devices can be accessed:
b Using a VW3 A3 310 communication card for the Altivar 61and 71 drives
b Using a TSX ETG 100 Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway
Bluetooth wireless link

The PowerSuite software workshop can communicate via a Bluetooth radio link if
the device is equipped with a Bluetooth Modbus VW3 A8 114. The adapter plugs
into the device connector terminal port or Modbus network port and has a range of
10 m (class 2).
Modbus multidrop connection
PLC (2)
If the PC does not feature Bluetooth technology, use the VW3 A8 115 USB Bluetooth adapter.
Bridge
Remote maintenance
A simple Modbus TCP connection is all that is required for the PowerSuite software
workshop to support remote monitoring and diagnostics.
When devices are not connected to the Modbus TCP network, or it is not directly
accessible, various remote transmission solutions may be used instead (modem,
WHOHSURFHVVLQJJDWHZD\HWF3OHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
Modbus
serial link
ATV 31 or
Lexium 05
ATS 48
ATV 61
ATV 71
(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/75.

(2) Please refer to our specialist "Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7
software" and "Automation platform Modicon M340" catalogues.
Modbus TCP connection
10
Presentation:
page 1/72
References:
page 1/74
1/73
References

Description
536848
2
VW3 A8 104
536847
Reference
Weight
kg
0.100
PowerSuite CD-ROM
VW3 A8 104
b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian
and Spanish
b Variable speed drive, starter and servo drive technical manuals
PowerSuite update
CD-ROM (1)
b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian

and Spanish
b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals
VW3 A8 105
0.100
PC serial port connection kit

for point-to-point Modbus
connection
VW3 A8 106
b 1 x 3 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector on starter-controller or
drive side and 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with 1 9-way female
SUB-D connector on PC side
b For the ATV 11 drive: 1 converter with one 4-way male SUB-D
connector and 1 RJ45 connector
b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter
0.350
RS 232/RS 485 interface

for multidrop Modbus
connection
XGS Z24
b 1 Modbus multidrop converter for connection to screw
terminals. Requires a 24 V c (20...30 V), 20 mA power supply (2)
0.105
Modbus-Bluetooth adapter
(3)
VW3 A8 114
b 1 Bluetooth adapter (10 m range, class 2)
with 1 RJ45 connector
b For PowerSuite: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
b For TwidoSoft: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and
1 mini DIN connector
b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter
0.155
USB - Bluetooth adapter for

PC
This adapter is required in the case of a PC that does not feature

Bluetooth technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC.
10 m range (class 2)
VW3 A8 115
0.290
4
VW3 A8 114
Composition
(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-Rom,
VW3 A8 104.
(2) Please refer to the "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies" catalogue.
(3) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.
10
Presentation:
page 1/72
1/74
Functions:
page 1/72
Compatibility
Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)

Connexion
Modbus
Controller
Startercontroller
Soft start/
soft stop
unit
TeSys T
TeSys U (2)
ATS 48
ATV 11
ATV 31
ATV 61
ATV 71
LXM 05A LXM 05B LXM 05C
V2.5
V1.40
V1.30
V1.40
V2.0
V2.3
V2.2
V2.2
V2.4
V2.5
V2.3
V2.2
Drives
Servo drives
Modbus TCP (device equipped

with Modbus TCP card)
Modbus TCP via

Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway
V1.50
V2.0
V2.3
V2.2
V2.2
V2.4
V2.5
Bluetooth
V2.2
V2.2
V2.3
V2.2
V2.2
V2.4
V2.5
Compatible software versions

Incompatible software versions
Hardware and software environments

7KH3RZHU6XLWHVRIWZDUHZRUNVKRSFDQRSHUDWHLQWKHIROORZLQJ3&HQYLURQPHQWVDQGFRQJXUDWLRQV
b Microsoft Windows XP SP1, SP2,
b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM
b 69*$RUKLJKHUGHQLWLRQPRQLWRU
(1) Minimum software version.

(2) TeSys U starter-controller without communication module or with Modbus LUL C031 or LUL C033 communication module.
10
Presentation:
page 1/72
Functions:
page 1/72
References:
page 1/74
1/75
Presentation,
references

1
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
510916
Presentation
When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the
TeSys U starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2).
The use of dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 allows remote
connection of 4 starter-controllers.
511529
Outputs for starter commands

RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box
511528
1
2
The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC
I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw
terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system
(1).
The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each
starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB 12 or LU2B A0BL power base and a
c 24 V control unit LUCp ppBL.
Splitter boxes LU9 G02 and LU9 G03 distribute information from the PLC I/O
modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it.
Splitter box LU9 G02 (maximum of 4 reversing starters) is optimised for use with
card TSX DMZ28DTK and splitter box LU9 G03 (maximum of 8 reversing starters)
for use with cards TSX DMZ64DTK and BMX DDM3202K.
Parallel wiring module LUF C00 has:

b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running,
b 3 inputs: position of the rotary knob, fault indication and position of the poles.
Each of the channels of LU9 G0p splitter boxes has:

b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, in the case of a
reversing starter.
b 2 inputs: fault indication and position of poles.
LU9 G02
Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables:

b RJ45 LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres,
b 490 NTW 000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres.
LU9 G03
Parallel type connection
510917
Architecture
10
3 Parallel wiring module

LUF C00
4 Pre-wired coil connection
LU9B N11C
5 Connection cable LU9 Rp with
one RJ45 connector at each
end
6 Splitter box LU9 G02 or
LU9 G03 for 8 motor starters
with channel connections on
the PLC side by two HE 10
connectors and on the startercontroller side by 8 RJ45
connectors.
7 Connection cable
TSX CDPppp with one HE 10
connector at each end.
9
To
PLC
11
12
12
References
Description
Item
Reference
LUF C00
(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue.
(2) Please consult our "IP20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB" catalogue
10
Dedicated parallel interface module

(STB EPI 2145)
9 Power base
10 c 24 V control unit (LUC B/D/C/M pp BL)
11 Parallel wiring module (LUF C00)
12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks
1/76
Weight
kg
0.045
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
566964
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.
Connection of communication module output terminals

to the coil terminals
By pre-wired connector or wire link.

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection
The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description
Pre-wired coil
connection
4
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B
For use with

power base
LUB pp
Item
Reference
LU9B N11C
LU2B pp
13
LU9M RC
Weight
kg
0.045
0.030
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may by used.
Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC

510918
No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection
LVYLDDVSOLWWHUER[ZKLFKDOORZVXSWRVWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUVWREHFRQQHFWHGD
maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed.
The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply.
Splitter boxes
Connectors
PLC side
Starter-controller
side
8 x RJ45
2 x HE 10
20-way
For use with
Reference
Weight
4 reversing starters
maximum
LU9 G02 (1)
0.260
8 reversing starters
maximum
LU9 G03 (1)
0.260
kg
Connection cables to the splitter box

Connectors
Item
2 x RJ45 connectors
13
Length
m
0.3
1
3
LU9 R03
LU9 R10
LU9 R30
Weight
kg
0.045
0.065
0.125
Weight
Reference
Connection cables from splitter box to PLC

Type of connection
Gauge
PLC side
Splitter box
side
AWG
HE 10
HE 10
22
20-way
20-way
C.s.a.
Length
Reference
mm2
0.324
m
0.5
1
2
3
5
TSX CDP 053

TSX CDP 103
TSX CDP 203
TSX CDP 303
TSX CDP 503
kg
0.085
0.150
0.280
0.410
0.670
28
0.080
1
2
3
ABF H20 H100

ABF H20 H200
ABF H20 H300
0.080
0.140
0.210
0.324
0.5
BMX FCC 053
0.210
BMX FCC 103
0.350
BMX FCC 203
0.630
BMX FCC 303
0.940
BMX FCC 503
1.530
10
BMX FCC 1003
3.000
3
5
TSX CDP 301

TSX CDP 501
0.400
0.660
LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M
HE 10
40-way
Bare wires
2 x HE 10
20-way
HE 10
20-way
22
0.324
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and
transmits commands.
1/77
10
Presentation,
references

1
AS-Interface communication modules
Presentation
1
510919
AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 make it easy to

connect starter-controllers to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allow
remote control and command of these starter-controllers.
Module ASILUF C51 features extended addresing.
The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present,
communication fault, addressing fault,) are indicated on the front panel by a green
LED 1 and a red LED 2.
Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is

totally transparent to the user.
3
1
2
3
4
Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present

Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault
Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary
power supply
5 Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface
system
The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed

on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing
terminal.
The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and
must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL.
The product is supplied with a yellow connector 4 for connection to the AS-Interface
system, a black connector 5 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black
connector 3 for connection of the outputs.
Series type connection
Architecture
6 Communication modules ASILUF C5 or

ASILUF C51
7 Tap-off TCS ATV01N2
8 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
5
6
6
7
24 V
AS-Interface
Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system

$6,QWHUIDFHSUROHV
Data bits (command)
8
Data bits
(status)
Bit value
Command D0 (O)
Command D1 (O)
Command D2 (O)
Command D3 (O)
')SUROHDQG$(SUROH
=0
=1
Stop forward
Forward running
Stop reverse
Reverse running
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Bit value
Status D0 (I)
Status D1 (I)
Status D2 (I)
Status D3 (I)
=0
Not ready or fault
Stopped
Not used
Not used
=1
Ready
Running
Not used
Not used
References
Description
Communication
modules
10
1/78
Addressing
Single
31 slaves
Extended
62 slaves
Item
Reference
ASI LUF C5
ASI LUF C51
Weight
kg
0.065
0.065
AS-Interface communication modules
510920
Connection of communication module output terminals to the

coil terminals

The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
1
Description
Pre-wired
coil connection
For use with

power base
LUB pp
Item
Reference
LU9B N11C
LU2B pp
LU9M RC
Weight
kg
0.045
0.030
b Wire link
may be used.
531122
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B
Connection of the communication module (1)

This is achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables:
b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow).
b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
1
5
Description
Tap-off
Length
m
2
Reference
XZ CG0142
Weight
kg
0.265
Consoles and cable adapter

Description
520898
520899
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M
Reference
Addressing terminal
Battery operated. Battery charger supplied
AS-Interface V.1 and V.2.1 compatible
Adjustment and diagnostics console
Runs on LR6 batteries
Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 slaves
and diagnostics
Cable adapter
For console XZ MC11
XZ MC11
Weight
kg
0.550
ASI TERV2
0.500
XZ MG12
0.070
Software set-up
$6,QWHUIDFHFRQJXUDWLRQLVFDUULHGRXWXVLQJ3/0LFUR-XQLRU3URVRIWZDUH)URP
WKHPRGXOHGHFODUDWLRQVFUHHQLWLVSRVVLEOHWRFRQJXUHDOOWKHVODYHGHYLFHV
corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O.
&RQJXUDWLRQLVFDUULHGRXWE\IROORZLQJWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVRQWKHVFUHHQ
XZ MC11
ASI TERV2

Application
Language
Reference
Weight
kg
0.022
Multi-language LU9 CD1

(3)
(1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires.
Black wire: + 24 V.
White wire: 0 V.
Blue wire: AS-Interface ().
Brown wire: AS-Interface (+).
On CD-Rom
1/79
10
Presentation
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHDQGSUHZLUHGFRLO
connection components
567139
Presentation
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
PRGXOH/8/&DOORZV7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUVWREHFRQWUROOHGYLD3UREXV'3
(Deported Periphery).
Communication module LULC07 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems
LQWHUQDOUHJLVWHUVZKLFKFDQEHDFFHVVHGYLDWKH3UREXV'3EXVLQF\FOLFRUDF\FOLF
PRGH7KLVPRGXOHKDVD9$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWH
inputs.
10
Connections
Serial bus topology
11
8 7 6
15
1 LED indicating module status
2 Fault signalling LED
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1,
OA3 and LO1
4 SUB-D connector for bus link
5 c 24 V supply connection
6 Discrete input
7 Discrete input
8 Discrete output
9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing)
10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or
multifunction)
13
15
13
14
16
18
17
12
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
12
18
18
18
17
24 V
24 V
3URJUDPPDEOHFRQWUROOHUZLWK3UREXV'3PDVWHUFDUG
Other slave (not powered via the bus)
3UREXV'3ZLUHFDEOH76;3%6&$ P76;3%6&$ P
6WDQGDUG3UREXV'3FRQQHFWRU1$'RU1$'
3UREXV'3SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOHIRUc 24 V-Aux supply to LUL C07 modules (LU9 GC7)
3UREXV'3FRQQHFWRU7H6\V8GHGLFDWHG/8$'
3UREXV'3ZLUHFDEOH/853%ppp)
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
3UREXV'3JHQHUDOLQIRUPDWLRQ
7KH7H6\V8FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHVXSSRUWV3UREXVDSSOLFDWLRQSUROHVEDVHG
on DP V0 and DP V1 services: motor starter (MS), motor management starter
(MMS).
Cyclic / Acyclic services
In general, data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services.
7KHDSSOLFDWLRQSUROHVGHQHIRUWKHF\FOLFGDWD
b manufacturer independent data,
b PDQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLFGDWD
DP V1 Read / Write services

DP V1 read and write services allow access to all data that cannot be accessed by
cyclic data exchange.
PKW feature
In order to make data which is not cyclically exchanged accessible for DP V0
masters, a function called PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words) is implemented.
The cyclic data carries a dedicated zone of 4 input words and 4 output words, called
3.:ZKLFKPDNHVLWSRVVLEOHWRDFFHVVDOOWKHUHJLVWHUVHQEORF
Electronic device description

7KH7H6\V8V\VWHPLVGHVFULEHGE\D*6 OH(1)7KLVOHZLOOEHXVHGE\DQ\
3UREXVFRQJXUDWLRQWRROWRJHWLQIRUPDWLRQDERXWWKHGHYLFH
7KH*6 OHVDQGDVVRFLDWHGLFRQGHGLFDWHGWRWKH7H6\V8V\VWHPFDQEH
GRZQORDGHGIURPWKHZZZVFKQHLGHUHOHFWULFFRPZHEVLWH/LEUDU\6RIWZDUH
Tools).
10
(1) Replace the asterisk with the letter corresponding to the required language.
1/80
references

1
106949
Information carried by the bus

Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C07.
&RPSDWLELOLW\RI3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
with c 24 V control units
LUL C07 in conjunction with:
LUCB/C/D ppBL LUCM ppBL
LUCA ppBL
Standard
Advanced
Multifunction
control unit
control unit
control unit
Information accessible
YLD3UREXV'3

Start and Stop commands
Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed
LUL C07
References
Description
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH
Item
Reference
18
LUL C07
Weight
kg
0.108

coil terminals
510951

recommended.
Description
OA3 OA1 COM
c 24 V
Item
Reference
LU9B N11L
LU2B pp
LU9M RL
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
COM
LI2
c 24 V
LI1
LO1
For use with

power base
LUB pp
Components for connection to the bus and to the installation

The c9$X[VXSSO\WR3UREXV'3PRGXOHV/8/&PXVWSDVVWKURXJKSRZHU
supply module LU9 GC7.
LUL C07 modules must be connected to the LU9 GC7 splitter box in order to be
powered.
The number of TeSys U starter-controllers that can be powered by an LU9 GC7
module is limited by the maximum current (1.5 A) which it can deliver.
The c 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately.
Description
Length
m
Item
(1)
Reference
15
LU9 GC7
Weight
kg
16
LU9 AD7
3UREXV'3FDEOHV
2-wire
100
TSX PBSCA100
TSX PBSCA400
3UREXV'3FDEOHV
4-wire
10
13
13
17
17
17
LU9 RPB010
LU9 RPB100
LU9 RPB400
3UREXV'3
power supply module
3UREXV'3FRQQHFWRU
c 24 V
A1
A2
L1
On
power
base
0V
400
100
400
(1) See connection diagram on page 1/80.

Connection of power supplies
1/81
10
Compatibility

with starter-controller LUB 12 / LUB 32
Maximum 1
or
or
2
3UREXV
DP
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
nonreversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
LUC B1XBL LUC D1XBL
LUC M1XBL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
LUC A05BL
LUC B05BL LUC D05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A12BL
LUC B12BL LUC D12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
7.5
LUB 32
LUC A18BL
LUC B18BL LUC D18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
15
LUB 32
LUC A32BL
LUC B32BL LUC D32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C07
LU9 BN11L
567122
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control
unit
Advanced
control
unit
Nonreversing
Class 10
Class 10
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A6XBL
LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL
0.25
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LUB 12
or LUB 32
5.5
kW
0.09
3
4
LUB + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9B N11L
Multifunction
control
unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: 3UREXV'3PRGXOH/8/&LVQRWFRPSDWLEOHZLWK/870FRQWUROOHUV
10
1/82
Compatibility (continued)
with starter-controller LU2B 12 / LU2B 32
Maximum 5
or
or
2
567123
3UREXV
DP
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
LUC B1XBL LUC D1XBL
LUC M1XBL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
LUC A05BL
LUC B05BL LUC D05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A12BL
LUC B12BL LUC D12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
7.5
LU2B 32BL
LUC A18BL
LUC B18BL LUC D18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
15
LU2B 32BL
LUC A32BL
LUC B32BL LUC D32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C07
LU9 MRL
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control
unit
Advanced
control
unit
Reversing
Class 10
Class 10
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A6XBL
LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL
0.25
or LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
5.5
kW
0.09
6
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9M RL
Multifunction
control
unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: 3UREXV'3PRGXOH/8/&LVQRWFRPSDWLEOHZLWK/870FRQWUROOHUV
10
1/83
Presentation
CANopen communication module and
pre-wired coil connection components
Presentation
Communication module LUL C08 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on a CANopen bus.
Module LUL C08 is of the slave type.
When used in conjunction with an LUC pppBL or LUC pT1BL control unit, module
LUL C08 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.
)RUORFDOFRQWUROUHTXLUHPHQWVWKHPRGXOHLVHTXLSSHGZLWKDFRQJXUDEOHc 24 V.
9GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
LUL C08 communication modules can be connected to Advantys STB module :
XBE 2100K.
8 7 6
Connections
Star topology

3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3
Bus topology
10
12
12
and LO1
4
5
6
7
8
9
SUB-D connector for bus link
Discrete output
11
13
11
Discrete input
Discrete input
16
16
c 24 V supply connection
17
c 24 V
15
or
14
16
11
junction box).
14
17
11 Cable TSX CANCpp equipped with a TSX CANKCDF90T

12 Terminal block TSX CANTDM4 with 4 SUB D type
16
19
10 CANopen master module TSX CPP110 (PMCIA card with

connector (to be assembled)
17
c 24 V
17
15
18
connectors for connection of slaves and screw terminal

blocks (connection of bus and dedicated 24 V supply to
modules LUL C08).

The c 24 V power supply for modules LUL C08 is distributed via the bus and must
EHFRQQHFWHGWRWKHUVW76;&$17'0MXQFWLRQER[7KHFDEOHFVDDOORZV
13 Connection between junction boxes TSX CANTDM4 by
cable TSX CANCADDpp or cable TSX CANCppWWHGZLWK connection of up to 25 LUL C08 modules .
TSX CANKCDF90T connectors.
Above this number, another power supply must be connected to the next junction
14 The slaves are connected by means of cables
box.
TSX CANCADDpp
15 Connections are made by means of cables TSX CANCpp
WWHGZLWK76;&$1.&')7FRQQHFWRUVIRUWKHVODYHV
and with TSX CANKCDF90T connectors for the junction
boxes.
16 Starter-controller
17 CANopen communication module LUL C08
18 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Modules

+ I/O modules)
19 CANopen extension module STB XBE 2100K
A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C08 for outputs OA1, OA3 and
LO1.
Depends on the type of control unit used.
Control unit
Standard
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual.
Advanced
Multifunction
Compatibility of CANopen communication module with

control units
LUCA ppBL / B ppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1)
All versions u V3.2
LUCM ppBL
All versions u V3.2
LUCM T1BL
(1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C factory code.
04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
10
1/84
References
CANopen communication module and
Communication services
Communication module LUL C08 uses PDO, SDO and PKW type objects for data
exchange (Process Data Objects, Service Data Objects, Periodically Kept in Acyclic
Words).
Transmit and Receive PDO

PDO 1
3UHFRQJXUHGDQGHQDEOHG
Real time command-control
7REHGHQHGE\FRQJXUDWLRQ
PDO 2, PDO 3 Unused

PDO 4
Adjustment, diagnostics and acyclic exchanges 3UHFRQJXUHGDQGHQDEOHG
510922
References
Description
CANopen communication module
Item
Reference
16
LUL C08
Weight
kg
0.108
Note: The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS), and users manuals are available on the website
www.schneider-electric.com.

16
17
Description
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9B N11L
For use with

power base
LUB pp
LU2B pp
566988

recommended.
Item
Reference
17
18
LU9B N11L
LU9M RL
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface.
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.
Cables for connection to the bus

Description
Length
m
Item
Reference
Weight
kg
0.3
14
14
14
14
11
11
TSX CANCADD03
0.045
TSX CANCADD1
0.065
TSX CANCADD3
0.125
TSX CANCADD5
1.500
14
14
14
14
11
11
TSX CANCBDD03
0.045
TSX CANCBDD1
0.065
TSX CANCBDD3
0.125
TSX CANCBDD5
1.500
Standard
16
Cables equipped with

SUB-D connectors
1.0
3
5
Reel of cable
18
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9M RL
50
100
TSX CANCA50
TSX CANCA100
UL approved
Cables equipped with
SUB-D connectors
0.3
1
3
5
Reel of cable
50
100
TSX CANCB50
TSX CANCB100
Separate components
Description
Elbowed connector
Straight connector
Junction box
Reference
Weight
kg
TSX CANKCDF90T
TSX CANKCDF180T
TSX CANTD M4
1/85
10
Presentation

DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil
567225
Presentation
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
module LUL C09 allows TeSys U starter-controllers and controllers to be controlled
via DeviceNet.
Communication module LUL C09 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U systems
internal registers which can be accessed via DeviceNet.
0RGXOH/8/&KDVDFRQJXUDEOH9$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZR
FRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
10
Connections
Serial bus topology
8 7 6
11

3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1,
OA3 and LO1 and 24 V bus
4 DeviceNet connector for bus link
5 c 24 V supply connection
6 Discrete input
7 Discrete input
8 Discrete output
9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (nonreversing and reversing)
10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or
multifunction)
10
1/86
63 starter-controllers max.
with modules LUL C09
24 V
12
11
12
13
14
13
13
13
14
14
14
Industrial PLC: Industrial Programmable Controller equipped with a DeviceNet Master.

Connection and power distribution box for supply to DeviceNet communication modules.
Starter-controller.
DeviceNet communication module LUL C09.
Presentation (continued),
references

1
567228

Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C09.
Compatibility of DeviceNet LUL C09 communication module with

c 24 V control units
LUL C09 in conjunction with:
LUCB/C/D ppBL LUCM ppBL
LUCA ppBL
Standard
Advanced
Multifunction
control unit
control unit
control unit
Information accessible
via DeviceNet

Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Functions performed
567226
LUL C09
OA3 OA1 COM
References
Description
V
Can_L
Can_H
Item
Reference
14
LUL C09
V+
DeviceNet communication module
Weight
kg
0.108
24 V
24 V
+
+
LI2
LI1
LO1
24 V

For use with

power base
LUB pp
Reference
LU2B pppp
LU9M RL
LU9B N11L

recommended.
Description
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
Supply
The 24 V supply to DeviceNet LUL C09 modules is provided via the (V+ , V-)
terminals.
The 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately from the supply
to the LUL C09 modules.
The 24 V Aux terminal is for supply to the LUCM control unit or the LUTM controller.
10
1/87
Compatibility

Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LUL C09

with starter-controller LUB 12 / LUB 32
Maximum 1
or
or
2
DeviceNet
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
nonreversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
LUC B1XBL LUC D1XBL
LUC M1XBL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
LUC A05BL
LUC B05BL LUC D05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A12BL
LUC B12BL LUC D12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
7.5
LUB 32
LUC A18BL
LUC B18BL LUC D18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
15
LUB 32
LUC A32BL
LUC B32BL LUC D32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C09
LU9 BN11L
567122
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Nonreversing
Class 10
Class 10
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A6XBL
LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL
0.25
LUB 12
or LUB 32
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LUB 12
or LUB 32
5.5
kW
0.09
3
4
LUB + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9B N11L
Multifunction
control unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers.
10
1/88
Compatibility (continued)
Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LUL C09

with starter-controller LU2B 12 / LU2B 32
Maximum 5
or
or
2
567123
DeviceNet
module
Pre-wired
coil
connection,
reversing
LUC M6XBL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
LUC B1XBL LUC D1XBL
LUC M1XBL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
LUC A05BL
LUC B05BL LUC D05BL
LUC M05BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A12BL
LUC B12BL LUC D12BL
LUC M12BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
7.5
LU2B 32BL
LUC A18BL
LUC B18BL LUC D18BL
LUC M18BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
15
LU2B 32BL
LUC A32BL
LUC B32BL LUC D32BL
LUC M32BL
LUL C09
LU9 MRL
power
ratings
50/60 Hz
400/415 V
Power
base
Standard
control unit
Advanced
control unit
Reversing
Class 10
Class 10
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A6XBL
LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL
0.25
or LU2B 12BL
LU2B 32BL
LUC A1XBL
1.5
LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
5.5
kW
0.09
6
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9M RL
Multifunction
control unit
Class 20
Classes
530
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers.
10
1/89
Presentation
Advantys STB communication module and
Presentation
9
4
Communication module LUL C15 allows direct connection of TeSys U startercontrollers and controllers on an Advantys STB island, between two segments or at
the end of a segment. In the latter case, the segment must be equipped with an EOS
(End of segment) extension module STB XBE1100.
The starter-controller will then be able to make use of the services provided by
Advantys STB: self-addressing, autobaud, fallback positions.
When used in conjunction with an LUC pppBL or LUC pT1BL control unit, module
LUL C15 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.
)RUORFDOFRQWUROUHTXLUHPHQWVWKHPRGXOHLVHTXLSSHGZLWKDFRQJXUDEOHc 24 V,
$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
Connections
10
8 7 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
Two-colour LED indicating module status

Fault signalling LED
LED indicating that c 24 V supply is ON
Bus connectors
c 24 V supply connection
Discrete input
Discrete input
Discrete output
14
13
15
12
16
13
13
14
14 + 16
17
13
13
12
18
14
12
14
17
12
10 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Module + I/O modules).

11 Extension module (EOS/End of segment) STB XBE1100.
12 Bus connecting cable LU9 RCDppHOERZHGVWUDLJKWIRUFRQQHFWLRQRIWKHUVW7H6\V8
communication module.
13 Starter-controller.
14 Communication module LUL C15.
15 Connector for connection of product either by wire link or using coil connection modules
LU9 BN11L or LU9 MRL.
16 Line end adapter LU9 RFL15.

17 Bus connection cable LU9 RDDpp, straight/straight, for connections between LUL C15 modules.
18 Beginning of segment (BOS).
Connection of power supply for the outputs
A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C15 for outputs OA1, OA3 and
LO1.

Control unit
Standard
functions
"Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual.
Advanced
Multifunction
Compatibility of Advantys STB communication module

with control units
10
LUCA ppBL / B ppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1)
All versions u V3.2
LUCM ppBL
All versions u V3.2
LUCM T1BL
(1) This date code is made up as follows: 2T or 2C: factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of
manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
1/90
References
Advantys STB communication module and
Possible architectures
The maximum number of starter-controllers and controllers that can be connected to
an Advantys STB island depends on the Network Interface Module (NIM) used and
the associated control units.
NIM
(Network Interface
Module)
CANopen
Standard
Basic
DeviceNet
Standard
Basic
3UREXV'3 Standard
Basic
Interbus
Standard
Basic
Fipio
Standard
Modbus plus Standard
Ethernet
Standard
Number of starter-controllers
LUCA ppBL LUCB ppBL LUCM ppBL
LUCC ppBL
LUCD ppBL
17
17
15
12
12
12
18
18
16
12
12
12
9
8
8
9
8
8
2
2
1
2
2
1
4
4
4
17
17
15
32
32
32
Number of controllers
LUCB pp
LUCD pp
LUCM pp
15
12
16
12
8
8
1
1
4
15
32
References
Description
Item
Reference
LUL C15
14
LU9 RFL15
16
End of segment (EOS)
STB XBE1100
11
STB XBE1300
Beginning of segment (BOS)
18
Advantys STB communication module

Line end adapter
14
Weight
kg
0.108

b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection.
recommended.
19
Description
For use with

power base
LUB pp
LU2B pp
Item
Reference
19
20
LU9B N11L
LU9M RL
Weight
kg
0.050
0.450
b Wire link:
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.
Cables
Description
14
&DEOHVWWHGZLWK
connectors,
one straight
and one elbowed
Length
m
0.3
1
3
5
20
&DEOHVWWHGZLWK
two straight connectors
0.3
1
3
0.012
Item
Reference
12
12
12
12
17
17
LU9 RCD03
Weight
kg
0.045
LU9 RCD10
0.065
LU9 RCD30
0.125
LU9 RCD50
1.500
LU9 RDD03
0.045
LU9 RDD10
0.065
LU9 RDD30
0.125
Note: User manuals are available on the website www.schneider-electric.com.
10
1/91
Presentation
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
Presentation
LUL C033
LUL C031
1
510624
566970
Communication modules LUL C031 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U startercontroller to be connected to the Modbus network.
They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V
control unit, LUCp ppBL.
They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements.
7KHPRGXOH/8/&DOVRKDVWZRFRQJXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
Series type connection
Architecture
Star topology
35
Bus topology
2
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
Module status signalling LED

24 V supply connection
RJ45 connector for RS485 Modbus link
2 discrete inputs
1 discrete output
12
To PLC
11
11 12
7
8
9
10
Communication module LUL C031 or LUL C033

Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
Connection cable VW3 A8 306 Rpp with one RJ45 connector at each end
Modbus hub LU9 GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller
with RJ45 connectors
11 T-junction VW3 A8 306 TFpp
12 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R

Control unit
Starter status
(ready, running, fault)
functions
Log function
Monitoring function
Functions performed
Standard
Advanced
Multifunction
For more detailed information, please refer to Users Manual LU9 CD1, see page
opposite.
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules
With starter-controllers and controllers

Starter-controllers and controllers
LUB pp / LU2Bp2
LUT M ppBL
Possible combinations.
10
1/92
LUL C031
LUL C033
References
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules (continued)

With power bases
Control unit software versions
LUCA ppBL
LUCB ppBL, LUCC ppBL and LUCD ppBL
LUCM ppBL
V1.04
V1.05
V1.06
V1.10 (1)
LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LUL C033
V2.2 (1)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
V2.11 (1)
LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
No
No
LUL C033
V2.1 (1)
Yes
Yes
With base controllers, version 1.200 (1)

Control unit software versions
LUCB TppBL and LUCD TppBL
LUCM TppBL
(1) And higher versions
511527
Combinations not permitted.
References
Description
Item
Reference
LUL C031
7
LUL C033
7
Modbus communication modules
Weight
kg
0.080
0.080

coil terminals
7

recommended.
Description
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B

For use with

power base
LUB pp
566967
LU2B pp
Item
Reference
8
13
LU9B N11C
5
Weight
kg
0.045
LU9M RC
0.030
b Wire link:
may be used.
Connection of communication modules on the serial bus

Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.
Description
7
Modbus hub
8 slaves
&DEOHVWWHGZLWK
2 x RJ45 connectors
Length
m
Item
Reference
10
LU9 GC3
0.3
9
9
9
11
11
12
VW3 A8 306 R03
0.045
VW3 A8 306 R10
0.065
VW3 A8 306 R30
0.125
VW3 A8 306 TF03
0.032
VW3 A8 306 TF10
0.032
VW3 A8 306 R
0.012
1
3
13
T-junctions (1)
0.3
1
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M
RS 485 line terminator
Weight
kg
0.260

Application
On CD-Rom
Language
Reference
Multi-language (3)
LU9 CD1
Weight
kg
0.022
(1) Fitted with 2 x RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied
with an RJ45 male connector (station side).
1/93
10
Presentation,
description,
setting-up

Communication gateways LUF P
0
Presentation
Communication gateways LUF P allow connection between the Modbus serial link
DQG)LSLR3UREXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWHOGEXVHV
$IWHUFRQJXUDWLRQWKHVHJDWHZD\VPDQDJHLQIRUPDWLRQZKLFKFDQEHDFFHVVHGE\
the Modbus serial link and make this information available for read/write functions
FRPPDQGPRQLWRULQJFRQJXUDWLRQDQGDGMXVWPHQWRQWKHHOGEXVHV
An LUF P communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a
35 mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus
serial link.
Example of architecture
LUF P
524177
Fipio
3UREXV'3
DeviceNet
&RQJXUDWLRQ
of gateway
by PC
(1)
Modbus
ATS 48 ATV 312
Description
Front panel of the product
1 LED indicating :
- communication status of the Modbus serial links,
- gateway status,
FRPPXQLFDWLRQVWDWXVRIWKH)LSLR3UREXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWEXV
2 &RQQHFWRUVIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR)LSLR3UREXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWEXVHV
2
561512
Underside of product
3 RJ45 connector for connection of the Modbus serial link
4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC
5 c 24 V power supply
3
Software set-up
For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7
0LFUR-XQLRU3URVRIWZDUHRU$%&&RQJXUDWRUVRIWZDUH
)RUWKH3UREXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWEXVHVVRIWZDUHVHWXSLVSHUIRUPHGXVLQJ
$%&&RQJXUDWRU
This software is included in the TeSys U users manual.
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop (see page 1/74).
10
Characteristics, references:
page 1/95
1/94
Dimensions:
page 1/95
Schemes:
page 1/118
Characteristics,
references,
dimensions
Communication gateways LUF P

0
Characteristics
Bus type
Environment
Ambient air temperature
Degree of protection
Electromagnetic
compatibility
Conforming to IEC 60664

Around the device
Emission
Immunity
Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected
Connection
Modbus
To a PC
Field bus
Supply
Consumption
Max.
Typical
Indication/diagnostics
Services
V
mA
mA
3UROH
Command
Monitoring
&RQJXUDWLRQDQGDGMXVWPHQW
Fipio
3UREXV'3
DeviceNet
Degree of pollution: 2
+ 5+ 50
IP 20
Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993
Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999
y8
By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard
By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit
By SUB D9 female
By 5-way removable
By SUB D9 female
connector
connector
screw connector
External supply, c 24 10 %
280
100
By LED on front panel
FED C32 or FED C32P
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV(1)
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV(1)
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
FRQJXUDEOHZRUGV
By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW)
References
Description
Communication
gateways
For use with

TeSys U starter-controllers,
Altistart 48,
Altivar 31,
Altivar 312
With bus/
serial link
Fipio/Modbus
3UREXV'30RGEXV
DeviceNet/Modbus
Reference
Weight
kg
0.245
0.245
0.245
LUF P1
LUF P7
LUF P9
Connectors
Reference
Weight
kg
VW3 A8 306 D30
0.150
VW3 A8 306 R03

VW3 A8 306 R10
VW3 A8 306 R30
TSX FP ACC12
Connection accessories
822631
Description
Connection cables
For use with

Modbus
Length
m
3
Fipio
0.3
1
3
1 RJ45 type connector and

one end with stripped wires
2 RJ45 type connectors
1 SUB-D 9 male connector
3UREXVPLGOLQH
3UREXVOLQHHQG

822713
TSX FP ACC 12
Connectors
490 NAD 911 03
0.050
0.050
0.150
0.040
490 NAD 911 04

490 NAD 911 03
Documentation
Description
Users manual for
TeSys U range (2)
Medium
Language
Reference
CD-Rom
Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian,

Spanish
LU9 CD1
Weight
kg
0.022
Dimensions
120
75
27
,IWKHJDWHZD\LVFRQJXUHGXVLQJ3/DQGQRW$%&&RQJXUDWRUWKH,2FDSDFLW\LVOLPLWHG
to a total of 26 words.
(2) This CD-Rom contains users manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules,
multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software,
$%&&RQJXUDWRU
Presentation, description:
page 1/94
Setting-up:
page 1/94
Schemes:
page 1/118
1/95
10
Characteristics

Environment
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
UL, CSA, CCC, GOST, ASEFA.

ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LROS.
ATEX.
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N14, Type E
UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0
690
600
kV
Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400
Conforming to standards
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Safety separation of circuits
SELV
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1,

overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
Conforming to UL508,
CSA C22-2 n14
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
appendix N
Front panel outside connection
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against
Front panel and wired terminals
GLUHFWQJHUFRQWDFW
Other faces
Protective treatment

around the device
Maximum operating altitude

Operating positions
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Storage
Operation
IP 40
IP 20
IP 20
7+
Cycles 12
h
48
C
- 40+ 85
C
Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70.
(At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for starter-controller LUB32, leave a
minimum gap of 9 mm between products).
Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60.
(At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 C and up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between
products.)
m
2000
In relation to normal vertical

mounting plane
30
90
6
30
Flame resistance
C
C
Environmental restrictions
Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27
(1)
Vibration resistance
5300 Hz

(1)
Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Immunity to dissipated
shock waves

Uc a 24240 V,
kV
Uc c 48220 V
Uc = 24 V c
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V
Immunity to conducted
high-frequency disturbance
10
Conforming to UL 94
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60695-2-12
Radiated emission
and conducted
V2
960 (parts supporting live components)
650
Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable
Power poles open: 10 gn
Power poles closed: 15 gn
kV
kV
V/m
kV
kV
Conforming to CISPR 11 and

EN 55011

Power poles closed: 4 gn (2)
In open air: 8 - Level 3
On contact: 8 - Level 4
10 - Level 3
All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4
Serial link: 2 - Level 3
Common mode
Serial mode
2
1
Not applicable
10
Class A
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
References :
pages 1/62 to 1/71
1/96
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
90
Characteristics
Power bases and control units
Power base, control unit or reverser block type
LUB 12 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD
LUB 32 + LUCA
or LUCB or LUCC
or LUCD
LUB 12 +
LUCM
LUB 32 +
LUCM
LU2M
LU6M
Power circuit connection characteristics

Connection to 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Solid cable
without cable end
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
2.510
2.510
1.56
1.56
16
16
16
16
110
110
16
16
3KLOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
1.92.5
1.92.5
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
1.92.5
1.92.5
1.92.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.81.2
0.81.2
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.81.2
0.81.2
0.81.2
24240
24240
24220
24220
2027
2027
2026.5
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
a 88264
c 88242
c 88242
14.5
14.5
14.5
14.5
29
29
55
55
130
220
140
220
280
280
280
280
60
80
70
90
35
45
35
25
2
3
99u 72 V: 50
35
35
3
3
At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms
15
15
3600
3600
24
2028
14.5
150
70
1.7
75
35
3
24
2028
14.5
200
75
1.8
65
35
3
15
3600
15
3600
120
2360
2300
1000
120
(2)
(2)
(2)
3
3
Yes
Yes
SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN
12
32
T y 70C: 12A
T y 70C: 32A
T y 70C: 12A
T y 70C: 32A
690 (3)
690 (3)
4060
4060
3
6
9
12 18 25 32
0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5
3
Yes
3
Yes
Control circuit connection characteristics

Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Solid cable
without cable end
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
Control circuit characteristics

Rated voltage
of control circuit
a 50/60 Hz
c
Voltage limits
Operation
c 24 V (1)
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V
c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
Drop-out
Typical consumption
I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation
Operating time
Closing
Opening
Resistance to micro-breaks
Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-11
Mechanical durability
In millions of operating cycles
Maximum operating rate
In operating cycles per hour
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
ms
ms
ms
Main pole characteristics

Number of poles
Isolation
Possible
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Padlocking
Rated thermal current
Rated operational current To IEC/
Category AC-41
(Ue y 440V)
EN 60947-6-2 Category AC-43
Rated operational voltage
Frequency limits
Of the operating current
Power dissipated
Operational current
in the power circuits
Power dissipated in all three poles
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit
Total breaking time
Thermal limit
With Isc max on 440 V
V
Hz
A
W
12
32
T y 55C: 12A T y 55C: 32A

T y 55C: 12A T y 55C: 32A
690 (3)
690 (3)
4060
4060
V
230
440
500
690
kA
50
50
10
4
ms
2
2
2
kAs
90
120
90
120
(1) Voltage with maximum ripple of 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
10
1/97
Characteristics

Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts
6SHFLFFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRISRZHUEDVHV/8%DQGUHYHUVHUEORFNV/80RU/80
a 50/60 Hz ms
c
ms
Without change of direction
ms
With change of direction
ms
Duration of inrush phase

Maximum
operating time
25
15
75
150
General characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Conventional
For ambient temperatureT< 70 C
thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the operational current
U min
Minimum switching capacityO = 10-8
I min
Short-circuit
protection
Short-time rating
Permissible for
1s
500 ms
100 ms
Insulation resistance
Non-overlap time
Guaranteed between
N/C and N/O contacts
Hz
V
mA
A
Up to 400
17
5
gG fuse: 4
A
A
A
m:
ms
30
40
50
10
2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
6SHFLFFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWVEXLOWLQWRWKHSRZHUEDVH
Linked contacts
Mirror contact

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Conforming to UL, CSA
V
V
V
Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked
7KH1&FRQWDFWWWHGLQHDFKSRZHUEDVHUHOLDEO\UHSUHVHQWVWKHVWDWHRIWKHSRZHU
contacts (safety scheme)
Up to ac 250
690
600
6SHFLFFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWVLQPRGXOHV/8)1RIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWV/8$
and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M

Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
V
V
V
Up to ac 250
250
250
Rated operational power of contacts

d.c. supply, category DC-13

Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.
V
VA
24
60
48
120
115
280
230
560
400
960
440 600
1050 1440
V
W
24
120
48
90
125
75
250
68
VA
16
32
80
160
280
300
420
70
50
38
33
VA
20
40
70
80
100
25
18
14
12
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
Millions of operating cycles
1 million
operating cycles
3 million
operating cycles
10 million
operating cycles
a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15

Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an
inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos M 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos M= 0.4)
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
10
References :
pages 1/63 and 1/64
1/98
24 V
48 V
125 V
250 V
1
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,2
0,1
0,1
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1
0,5 0,7 0,9
6
8 10
5
7 9
Current broken in A
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
0,1
0,1
0,2
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
0,3 0,4
0,6 0,8 1
0,5 0,7 0,9
3
4
6
8 10
5
7 9
Current broken in A
Characteristics
Control units
Characteristics of standard control units LUCA

Protection
Overload
protection
Short-circuit
protection
Motor type
Conforming to standard
Tripping class conforming to
UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current
Temperature compensation
Tripping threshold
Tripping tolerance
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n14
10
Hz
C
4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir (setting current)
20 %
Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD

Control unit type
Protection
Motor type
Overload
protection
Short-circuit
protection

UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Tripping threshold
Tripping tolerance
Hz
C
LUCB
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
10
LUCC
Single-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
10
LUCD
3-phase
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n14
20
4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %
4060
- 25+ 55
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %
4060
- 25+ 70
Yes
14.2 x Ir max.
20 %
Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM

Protection
Overload
protection
Communication
interface for
terminal on
enclosure door
Display
Auxiliary supply
Motor type
UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Maximum transmission speed
Maximum return time
Type
Language version
Precision
Resolution
External type
Heat dissipation
Parameters can be set: single-phase or 3-phase

IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable)
Hz
C
bit/s
ms
V
W
5060
- 25+ 55
RS 485 multi-drop
RJ45 on front panel
Modbus RTU
VHOIFRQJXUDWLRQXSWRWKLVYDOXH
200
LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters
Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish)
5%
1 % of Ir
c 24, with maximum ripple of 10 %.
0.8
&RQJXUDWLRQWDEOHIRUSURWHFWLRQGHYLFHVDQGDODUPVRQPXOWLIXQFWLRQFRQWUROXQLWV/8&0
Tripping
Alarm
Factory setting Factory setting
Adjustment of tripping
Adjustment of time before
Adjustment of alarm
threshold
tripping
threshold
Range
Default value Range
Default value Range
Default value
Overcurrent
Overload
Activated (1)
Activated (1)
Activated
317 Ir
0.532 A (2)
14.2
Ir min
Class: 530
Earth fault
Phase imbalance
Torque limitation
No-load running
Long starting time
Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Deactivated
0.25 Ir min
1030 %
18 Ir
0.31 Ir
18 Ir
0.3 Ir min
10 %
2 Ir
0.5 Ir
Ir
0.11.2 s
0.220 s
130 s
1200 s
1200 s
0.1 s
5s
5s
10 s
10 s
10100 % of
85 %
the thermal state
0.25 Ir min 0.3 Ir min
1030 %
10 %
18 Ir
2 Ir
0.31 Ir
0.5 Ir
18 Ir
Ir
&RQJXUDWLRQRIDGGLWLRQDOIXQFWLRQVRQPXOWLIXQFWLRQFRQWUROXQLWV/8&0
Reset
Time before reset
Type of load
Language
Display
References :
pages 1/69 and 1/70
Factory setting
Manual
120 s
3-phase motor
Self-cooled
English
Average current
Setting range
Manual, automatic or remote
11000 s
3-phase motor, single-phase motor
Self-cooled, force cooled
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of
last 5 faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated.
(2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
1/99
10
Characteristics

Limiter-disconnector, current limiter, thermal overload
alarm function module and thermal overload fault
signalling modules
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1

conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Operating threshold
Breaking capacity
690
32
I rms
kA
V
kA
50
440
690
130
70
Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1.510
1.5...6
110
16
1...6
1...6
3KLOOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
1.92.5
Mounting
Cabling
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
Flexible cable with cable end
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
N.m
Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920

Operating threshold
Breaking capacity
Mounting
Cabling
Solid cable
Flexible cable without cable end
I rms
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
690
63
A
V
kA
1000
440
100
Separate
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1.525
1.5...10
1.525
2.510
1.516
1.54
3KLOOLSVQRUDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
2.2
N.m
690
35
Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function modules LUF W10
Activation threshold
Hysteresis between activation and switching off
Display
Supply
Discrete output characteristics
Type
AC-15
DC-13
For ambient
A
temperatureT< 70 C
Conforming to
A
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Type
AC-15
DC-13
For ambient
temperatureT< 70 C
Conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Conductor c.s.a.
Length
Reset input
References :
pages 1/66 and 1/71
1/100
LUF DH11
LUF DA01
a/c 24 240
7 at c 24
1.1 at a 240
1 N/C+ 1 N/O
1 N/C
9PD[9$RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
9:RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
V
mA
Discrete outputs
10
gG fuse: 2
Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules

Module type
Fault signalling
External power supply
Module consumption
Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state

5%
Powered by the control unit
N/O contact
9PD[9$RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
9:RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
2
Dimensions :
pages 1/110 and 1/111
gG fuse: 2
mm2
m
0.2 min
500 (R = 50 : , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF)
Schemes :
pages 1/112 to 1/119
LUF DA10
1 N/O
Characteristics
Function modules and communication modules
Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2

Analogue output
Signal delivered
Load impedance
Signal characteristics
with advanced control unit
Signal characteristics
with multifunction control unit
Minimum
Maximum
Typical
Precision
k:
:
:
Precision
Resolution
4 - 20 mA
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC
500
100
6%
10 %
1 % of Ir
External c 24 V
Supply
Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51

Module type
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQ
$6,QWHUIDFHSUROH
Cycle time
Addressing
AS-Interface supply
Current consumption
C
ms
On the
AS-Interface bus
On 24 V supply
for the outputs
Auxiliary supply
Number of outputs
Switching capacity of the solid state outputs
V
mA
mA
mA
V
ASILUF C5
AS-Interface V2.1 n 52901
7.D.F.0
Operation - 25+ 70
5
31 slaves
29.5...31.5
Normal operation: 25
Fault condition: 30
200
ASILUF C51
AS-Interface V2.1 n 52303
7.A.7.E
10
62 slaves
c 24 30 %
2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits)
By 2 LEDs on front panel
Characteristics of Modbus communication module LUL C03p

Module type
Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Maximum transmission speed
Maximum return time
Addressing
Discrete inputs
bit/s
ms
C
Number
Supply
Input current
Nominal input values Voltage
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type
Solid state
outputs
Protection
Switching capacity
Number
Supply
Max. current
gI fuse
V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms
V
mA
A
LUL C031
RS 485 multi-drop
RJ45 on front panel
Modbus RTU
VHOIFRQJXUDWLRQXSWRWKLVYDOXH
30
By switches: from 0...31
Operation - 25+ 55
c 24 (positive logic)
7
10 ( 30 %)
10 ( 30 %)
Resistive
LUL C033
6
WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQJXUDWLRQ
c 24
7
3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation

c 24
500
1
0.5 A/24 V
10
1/101
Characteristics (continued)

&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRI&$1RSHQ3UREXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWFRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHV
3UREXV'3
LUL C07
NA
3UREXV'3
CANopen
LUL C08
S 20 (Schneider Electric)
CIADS-301 V4.02
DR 303-2
Protocol
Address
LVSG V1.0
MS (Motor Starter) and
MMS (Motor Management
Starter)
3UREXV'3
1125
Physical interface
Binary rate
9-way SUB-D male

9600 Kbits/s12 Mbits/s
Cables
2 shielded twisted pairs
Communication module
Services
Conformity class
Standard
3UROH
2
Structure
3
Supply for the
discrete outputs
and control

Logic inputs
5
Discrete outputs
c 24 V
Current consumption
Protection by gl fuse
Number
Supply
Input current
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type
Number
Max. current
Switching capacity
CAN 2.0A (2B passive)

0127 (by switches)
CAN 2.0A (2B passive)

063
9-way SUB-D female

10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500
and 1000 Kbits/s
(by switches)
2SHQ6W\OHFRQQHFWRU
125500 kbaud
V
A
A
2028
1.5 (max)
2
Operation -25+55
V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms
WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQJXUDWLRQ
c 24
7
7
10 ( 30%)
10 ( 30%)
Resistive
mA

500
Yes
0.5 A / c 24 V
Characteristics of Advantys STB communication module LUL C15
Physical interface
Connections
Protocol
Transmission speed
Addressing
Supply for the
c 24 V
discrete outputs Current consumption
and control
Protection by gl fuse
Discrete inputs
Number
Supply
Input current
Current
Response time
Change to state 1
Change to state 0
Input type
Discrete outputs
10
Number
Max. current
Switching capacity
CAN
Fire Wire
CAN 2.0 and CAN 2.B (passive mode)
kbit/s 800
Self-addressing
V
2028
A
1.5 (max)
A
2
C
Operation - 25+ 55
V
mA
V
mA
ms
ms
1/102
mA
DeviceNet
LUL C09
NA
IEC 62026-1,
ODVA (Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association)
MS (Motor Starter)
WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRFRQJXUDWLRQ
c 24
7
7
10 ( 30 %)
10 ( 30 %)
Resistive
500
Yes
0.5 A / c 24 V
Characteristics(continued)
Connection characteristics
Module type
LUF W10,
LUF DH11,
LUF DA01 and
LUF DA10
LUF V2
ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51

Outputs
5.08
3.81
Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
5.08
Connectors
Pitch
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor
mm
0.21.5
0.141
0.21.5
0.141
2 identical conductors
mm
0.21
0.140.75
0.21
0.140.75
Flexible cable Without

with cable end insulated
ferrule
1 conductor
mm
0.251.5
0.251
0.251.5
0.251
mm
0.251
0.250.34
0.251
0.250.34
With
insulated
ferrule
1 conductor
mm
0.251.5
0.250.5
0.251.5
0.250.5
(Use a double cable end)
mm
0.51
0.5
0.51
0.5
1 conductor
mm
0.21.5
0.141
0.21.5
0.141
mm
0.21
0.140.5
0.21
0.140.5
AWG 24 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 24 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
Solid cable
without cable end
Conductor size
1 conductor
3.81
Tightening torque
N.m
0.50.6
0.200.25
0.50.6
0.200.25
Flat screwdriver
mm
3.5
2.5
3.5
2.5
LUL C031,
LUL C033,
LUL C08 and
LUL C15
LUFC 00
LUL C09
3.81
3.81
Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
3.81
Module type
Connectors
Pitch
Flexible cable
without cable end
1 conductor
mm
0.141
0.141
0.141
Connection
on the bus
5 (Open Style)
DeviceNet
0.22.5
mm
0.140.75
0.140.75
0.140.75
0.51.5
Flexible cable Without

with cable end insulated
ferrule
1 conductor
mm
0.251
0.251
0.251
0.252.5
mm
0.250.34
0.250.34
0.250.34
0.251
With
insulated
ferrule
1 conductor
mm
0.250.5
0.250.5
0.250.5
0.252.5
(Use a double cable end)
mm
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.51.5
1 conductor
mm
0.141
0.141
0.141
0.22.5
mm
0.140.5
0.140.5
0.140.5
0.140.5
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 26 AWG 16
AWG 24 AWG 16
Solid cable
without cable end
Conductor size
1 conductor
Tightening torque
N.m
0.200.25
0.200.25
0.200.25
0.50.6
Flat screwdriver
mm
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.5
10
1/103
Curves

Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD

Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %.
Time (s)
1000
100
3
10
3
1
4
0,1
1
10
12
14
20
30
x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20.

2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10.
3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.
Tripping curves for control units LUCC
Time (s)

1000
100
2
10
0,1
1
1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state.

2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.
10
References :
page 1/69
1/104
10
12
14
20
30
Curves (continued)
Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Cold state curves
Time (s)

10000
1000
100
10
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5
5
0,1
1
9 10
12
11
13
14 16 18 20
30
15 17 19
10
References :
page 1/70
1/105
Curves (continued)

Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Hot state curves
Average operating times at 20 C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : 20 %
Time (s)
10000
1000
100
10
4
Class 30
Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5
5
0,1
1
9 10
12
11
10
References :
page 1/70
1/106
13
14 16 18 20
30
15 17 19
Curves (continued)
Current limitation on short-circuit

peak current (kA)
Ue = 460 V
100
10
4
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6 0,8 1
8 10
20
30
40
60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
1 Maximum peak current

2 32 A power base
3 12 A power base
Thermal limit on short-circuit

Sum of Idt (As) 103
Ue = 460 V
1000
6
1
100
10
8
1
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8 1
8 10
20
30
40
60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
1 32 A power base
2 12 A power base
10
References :
page 1/62
1/107
Selection

LUB 12
LUB 32
Use in category AC-41
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
1
6 7 8 9 10 12
32 40
Current broken in A
6
5
4
3
5
4
3
1
0,8
1
0,8
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,5
5,5
1,5
7,5
32 40
Current broken in A
6 7 8 9 10 12
2,2
0,75
0,55
15
11
7,5
5,5
2,2
0,75
0,55
230 V
10
References:
page 1/62
1/108
15
11
7,5
5,5
2,2
1,5
0,75
0,55
440 V
kW
kW
kW
LUB 32
400 V
10
8
LUB 32
10
8
1,5
LUB 12
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12
Ue y 440 V
6 7 8 9 10 12
32 40
21
Current broken in A
Selection

Ue y 440 V
Ue = 690 V
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 12
LUB 32
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03
0,03
0,02
0,02
0,01
2
10
20
30
40
50 66 100
200
60 80
170
Current broken in A
0,3
0,1
0,08
0,01
1
10
20
30
200
50 60
100
40 54 80
126
Current broken in A
10
References:
page 1/62
1/109
Dimensions

Dimensions
Starter-controllers
LUB: non-reversing
LU2B: reversing
6FUHZ[LQJ
Rail mounting
126
X1
126
30
6FUHZ[LQJ
Rail mounting
29
(2)
(2)
a (1)
45
X2
233237
224
120/125
X1
154
163167
73
X2
135 (1)
45
With Modbus module
135
:LWK$GYDQW\V67%&$1RSHQ3UREXV'3
or DeviceNet modules
147
Minimum electrical clearance:

X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V, X2 = 0
Reverser block for mounting separately from power base
6FUHZ[LQJ
115
104
Rail mounting
113
36
113
45
Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets

GV2 G445 and GV2 G454
GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09
GV1 G09
95
GV2 G245 and G254
38
18
a
l
GV2 G445 (2 x 45)
179
45
GV2 G454 (2 x 54)
206
54
GV2 G554
GV2 G245 (2 x 45)
89
GV2 G254 (2 x 54)
98
GV2 G345 et G354

260
Number of tap-offs
GV2 G445 (2 x 45)
224
269
314
359
GV2 G345 (2 x 45)
134
GV2 G454 (2 x 54)
260
314
368
422
GV2 G354 (2 x 54)
152
30
82
AK5 PC13, PC33, PC33L

45,5
AK5 JB144
45
81
79
10
438
452
(1) Depth with communication module.
(2) 5HWUDFWDEOH[LQJOXJV.
1/110
38
35,5
mounting

Dimensions, mounting
Current limiter LA9 LB920
93
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB1

Disconnector LUA LB10
115
103
154
146
0
45
a (1)
51
53,5
a
With Modbus module
135
With Advantys STB,

&$1RSHQ3UREXV'3RU
DeviceNet modules
147
Door interlock mechanisms

LU9 AP20
LU9 AP00
Door cut-out
45
55
171230
11,5
= =
54
162
162
230
230
= =
54
11,5
508
Addressing consoles
XZ MC11
ASI TERV2
195
209
80
84
30
35
Splitter boxes
/8*&3UREXV'3
LU9 GC3 (Modbus) LU9 G02 and LU9 G03

Rail mounting
6FUHZ[LQJ
Rail mounting
6FUHZ[LQJ
4 (2)
128
45
128
30
65
45
163167
170
154
163167
4 (2)
65
10
30
(1) Depth with communication module.

(2) 5HWUDFWDEOH[LQJOXJV.
1/111
Schemes

Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
22/NC
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
21/NC
14/NO
Control Unit
A2
A1
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
Control Unit
Pre-wired
With control unit LUCC or LUCM
82
84
81
A2
B1
A1
B3
A3
A2
B1
A3
A2
A1
V 6
U 2
A1
LU2B
6/T3
Control terminal block
B3
22/NC
21/NC
Control Unit
14/NO
13/NO
4/T2
Reverser
2/T1
5 L2
Connection of a single-phase motor

1 L1
13/NO
5/L3
Non-reversing
3/L2
Non-reversing
1/L1
Reverser blocks
LU2M
LU6M
B1
A1
B3
A2
Reverser Block
LU6M
A3
S3
S2
S1
S3
S2
S1
5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
Control terminal blocks
Reverser
82
84
81
A2
B1
A1
B3
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
LU6M
21
22
S3
S1
14
S2
A2
B1
A1
A3
B3
LU2M
A2
13
Basic scheme
A1
A3
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
Reverser Block
LU6M
S3
S2
S1
With pre-wired connector LU9 MRC
S1 Start next stage

S2 Electrical interlocking
S3 Maintaining contact
B1 Maintain forward running
B3 Maintain reverse running
A1 Pulse forward running
A2 Common
A3 Pulse reverse running
(1) Electronically operated
bistable electromagnet.
Add-on contact blocks

18/NO
95/NC
96/NC
97/NO
98/NO
67
17/NO
68
18/NO
LUA8 E20
57
17/NO
1/112
A2
A3 Reverse
Add-on contact modules
LUA1 C20
58
10
LUA1 C11
A1 Forward
B3 Reverse
B1 Forward
(1)
LUFN 20
LUFN 11
LUFN 02
33/NO
34/NO
43/NO
44/NO
31/NC
32/NC
43/NO
44/NO
31/NC
32/NC
41/NC
42/NC
Schemes (continued)

Control units
Standard control units LUCA
Advanced control units LUCB, LUCC, LUCD
Basic scheme
Basic schemehd
1
LUCA
LUCp
Power Base
Interface
Sensor
L1
Sensor
L1
Control
A.S.I.C.
Sensor
L2
Power Base
Interface
Control
A.S.I.C.
Sensor
L2
tr
tr
Sensor
L3
Sensor
L3
Therm. overload
Supply and
Detection of
start
sequence
memory
Interface module
7
1 and 2 Trips
3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
Test
A2
A1
Thermal
overload
memory
A2
A1
Supply and
Detection of
start
sequence
9 10 11
12
1 and 2 Trips
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Earth
8 Thermal status/Set
9 Reset mode/Reset
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Vc2
12 Vc1
Multifunction control units LUCM

Multifunction Control Unit
D(B)
D(A)
+5V
0V
LUCM
24 V Aux
4 5 7
6 8
Basic scheme
1
LUCM
Power Base
Interface
Sensor
L1
Sensor
L2
Display and
Parameter Entry
ESC
Control
A.S.I.C.
Sensor
L3
ENT
RS485
Supply and
detection of
start
sequence
Thermal
overload
memory
D(B)
D(A)
+5V
0V
4
5
RJ45
7
8
Supply
Interface module
A2
A1
24 V Aux
7
9 10 11 12
1 and 2 Trips
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Earth
8 N/C
9 Earth
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Rx/Tx
12 Vc1
10
1/113
Schemes (continued)

Function modules
Alarm
LUF W10
LUF V2
4-20 mA output
Analogue output Module
LUFV 2
Alarms Module
LUFW 10
08
07
24 V Aux
NC
24 V Aux
4...20 mA
Basic scheme
Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
LUFW 10
Input interface
LED
LUFV 2
Input interface
Supply
Supply
P - Analogue/Digital
converter
Isolation
08
Digital/Analogue
converter
07
Relais bistable
Voltage/Current converter
4...20 mA
5
100 : < load < 500 : c 30 V max and 40 mA min
Communication modules
Communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection
AS-Interface Module
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
AS-Interface Module
AS-i
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
ASILUF C5
or
Ready-Fault-Pole
DEL
10
ASILUF C51
A2SI
1/114
OA1
Com
Output interface
OA3
AS-i
AS-Interface Module
AS-i
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51
AS-i
OA3
OA1
Com
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
Schemes (continued)

Communication modules (continued)

Modbus communication module LUL C031
Modbus communication module LUL C033
D(B)
D(A)
0V
LI2
LO1
OA3
LI1
24 V
Aux
D(B)
D(A)
0V
LI2
24 V
c
COM
4 5 8
6
Basic scheme
LI2
LI1
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
4 5 8
24 V
c
24 V
Aux
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
LUL C033
LO1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
24 V Aux
Com
4 5 8
6
LUL C031
LO1
COM
Modbus Module
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
4 5 8
6
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
24 V
Aux
LUL C033
LI1
24 V Aux
Com
LO1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
LUL C031
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
24 V
c
LO1
OA1
4 5 8
6
Modbus Module
LUL C033
Com
LO1
24 V Aux
Com
OA3
OA1
Com
D(B)
D(A)
0V
Modbus Module
LUL C031
COM
4 5 8
Basic scheme
Controller
x6
LUL C031
LED
Control unit interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
D(B)
RS485
D(A)
0V
LED
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
D(B)
4
5 Modbus
RJ45
8
RS485
5 Modbus
RJ45
8
Supply
LI2
LI1
I/O interface
LO1
OA3
24 V Aux
Output interface
Com
AL2
OA1
Com
LO1
OA3
OA1
AL1
Supply
Com
D(A)
0V
AL1
Output interface
24 V
LUL C033
Input interface
AL2
24 V
c
24 V
Aux
COM
10
1/115
Schemes (continued)

CANopen communication module LUL C08
LI2
LI1
LO1
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
LI2
Bus
LI2
LO1
LI2
LI1
LO1
Canopen Module
LUL C08
Bus
LI1
3UREXV'30RGXOH
Basic scheme
Bus
LUL C07
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
LO1
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
Canopen Module
LUL C08
Bus
LI2
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
LI1
LO1
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC
3UREXV'30RGXOH
LUL C07
Bus
LI1
Com
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
Bus
Canopen Module
LUL C08
OA1
3UREXV'30RGXOH
LUL C07
OA3

3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
Basic scheme
Controller
Controller
x6
x6
LUL C07
LED
LUL C08
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
LED
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
6
AL1
AL1
Supply
Supply
AL2
LI2
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
LI1
I/O interface
AL2
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
I/O interface
DeviceNet communication module LUL C09

Basic scheme
Controller
x6
DeviceNet Module
LUL C09
LUL C09
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
Bus
OA3
LED
Controller
interface
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
DeviceNet Module
LUL C09
Supply
10
DeviceNet Module
LUL C09
1/116
LI2
LI1
LO1
Bus
AL2
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
I/O interface
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
AL1
LI2
LI1
LO1
Bus
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
24 V c
Schemes (continued)


Advantys STB communication module LUL C15
Parallel wiring modules
Advantys STB Module
LUL C15
Parallel bus Module
LUF C00
Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Advantys STB Module
LUL C15
OA3
In Out
OA1
Com
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA3
OA1
Bus
Parallel bus Module
LUF C00
LI2
LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil
LI1
LO1
Bus
In Out
Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
Advantys STB Module
LUL C15
Parallel bus Module
LUF C00
LI2
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
LI1
LO1
Bus
In Out
Basic scheme
Link // RJ45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
LUF C00
Controller
x6
OA1
Ready-Fault-Pole
Address
OA3
Controller
interface
Com
LED
Ready
Fault
Pole
LUL C15
RJ45
1
OUT
IN
AL1
Supply
AL2
LI2
LI1
LO1
Com
OA1
OA3
I/O interface
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
Selector in position
Pole state
Reserved
Fault
Input common
3UREXV'3SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOH/8*&
LU9 GC7
IN
OUT
Filter
24 V Aux.
10
1/117
Schemes (continued)

X2
RJ45
X5
X5
Forward running
N/C
Commun des sorties
N/C
Pole state RJ45
N/C
Fault
+ 24 V Aux
X10
X6
RJ45
X6
X7
RJ45
RJ45
X7
Shielding
RJ45
X8
(3)
Forward running X1
Forward running X2
Forward running X3
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
Forward running X7
Forward running X8
Reverse running X1
Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+ c 24 V
Com
+ c 24 V
Com
RJ45
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Com
Inputs
Com
Outputs
0V
Shielding
24 V Aux
0V
Shielding
D (A) +
D (B)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
X4
RJ45
X10
X8
(2)
Forward running X1
Forward running X2
Forward running X3
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
Forward running X7
Forward running X8
Reverse running X1
Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4
Reverse running X5
Reverse running X6
Reverse running X7
Reverse running X8
+ c 24 V
Com
+ c 24 V
Com
X5
RJ45
RJ45
X3
Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole state X1
Pole state X2
Pole state X3
Pole state X4
Pole state X5
Pole state X6
Pole state X7
Pole state X8
+ 24 V Aux
Com
+ 24 V Aux
Com
RJ45
Colours of
TSX CDPppp
connection
cable wires
(4)
1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Grey
6 Pink
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
10 Violet
11 Grey-pink
12 Red-blue
13 White-green
14 Brown-green
15 White-yellow
16 Yellow-brown
17 White-grey
18 Grey-brown
19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown
X10
X6
RJ45
(3)
X7
RJ45
X8
RJ45
24 V Aux
Com
RJ45
RJ45
Inputs
X4
RJ45
X4
RJ45
(2)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X3
X2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
RJ45
X9
Com
X3
N/C
N/C
N/C
D (B)
RJ45 D (A) +
N/C
24 V
(1)
0V
Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole state X1
Pole state X2
Pole state X3
Pole state X4
Pole state X5
Pole state X6
Pole state X7
Pole state X8
+ 24 V Aux
Com
+ 24 V Aux
Com
Outputs
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X9
X9
LU9 G03
X1
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
N/C
Pole state RJ45
+ 24 V
Fault
+ 24 V Aux
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LU9 G02
X1
Forward running
Reverse running
Output common
N/C
Pole state RJ45
N/C
Fault
+24 V Aux
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LU9 GC3
X1
N/C
N/C
N/C
D (B)
D (A) + RJ45
N/C
N/C
0V
X2
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G03
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Modbus hub LU9GC3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Wiring hub and splitter boxes
Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors.
20-way HE10 input connector.
20-way HE10 output connector.
Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Gateways
Fip I/O - Modbus Gateway
LUF P1
24 V Aux
X2 Fip I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
1/118
X1
4 5 8
LUF P7
24 V Aux
LUF P9
3UREXV0RGEXV*DWHZD\
X2 Profibus
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X1
4 5 8
LUF P9
24 V Aux
DeviceNet - Modbus Gateway

X2 DeviceNet
1 2 3 4 5
X1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
LUF P7
D(B)
D(A)
0v
LUF P1
D(B)
D(A)
0V
4 5 8
Schemes (continued)

'DWDSUROHXQGHU$6,QWHUIDFH
Control unit present in the product
Status
Standard
LUCA
D0
D1
D0
D1
Commands
Advanced
LUCB,
CC, CD
Multifunction
LUCM
Main registers DFFHVVLEOHZLWK0RGEXV&$1RSHQ$GYDQW\V67%3UREXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWFRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHV

For other registers and for further information, please consult the User's Manual Communication variables on the website www.schneider-electric.com
Control unit present in the product
Standard
Advanced Multifunction
Marking
Register 0Register 99
WordsBits Commercial reference, serial number, software version
Log
Register 100Register 450 WordsBits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips
Status
Register 451Register 464 WordsBits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits)
Values
Register 465Register 473 Words
Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status
Earth leakage current.
Phase imbalance and phase failure
Register 474Register 599 WordsBits Reserved
&RQJXUDWLRQ Register 600Register 699 WordsBits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset
mode
Commands
Register 700Register 714 WordsBits Commands
Status and
values
Register 452
Register 455
Register 461
Register 465
Register 466
&RQJXUDWLRQ Register 602
Register 682
Commands
Register 700
Register 704
Ready (available)
Poles closed (running)
Start - forward running
Start - reverse running
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 3
Word
Word
Short-circuit fault
Overcurrent fault
Thermal overload fault
Ready (available)
Poles closed
Fault
Alarms
Tripped ("TRIP" position)
Fault acknowledgement allowed
Reserved
Motor running
Reserved
Motor starting
Thermal status value
Motor load value (Im/Ir)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Value 0
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
Manual reset on thermal overload fault

Remote reset on thermal overload fault
Automatic reset on thermal overload fault
Fallback mode validation
Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged
Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0
Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged,
signalling existence of communication failure
Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged
Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 615
LO1 output command

OA1 output command
OA3 output command
Reserved
Fault acknowledgement
Reserved
Trip test
Reserved
10
Data accessible
1/119
Basic schemes

Non-reversing
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
U1 2/T1
Control Unit
M
3
2-wire control via 2-position switch
3-wire control, pulsed start with

maintaining contact
4
A1
A2
A1
Connection of a motor load indicator

module LUFV 2
A2
4...20 mA
13
Analogue output Module
LUFV 2
Start
Stop
24 V Aux
24 V Aux
14
NC
5
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10
Automatic reset
V1
A2
08
A2
24230 V
X2
Z2
Z1
A1
QF1
X1
LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset
24230 V
X2
X1
Z1
Automatic or remote reset
Z2
LUF DA10
07
08
V1
07
A1
S2
QF1
S1
Control via Modbus communication module LUL C033
S1
Modbus
A2
10
1/120
A1
LI2
LI1
LO1
OA3
OA1
4 5 8
6
Modbus Module
LUL C033
Com
Com
LO1
OA3
24 V Aux
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Modbus Module
LUL C031
OA1
Control via Modbus communication module

LUL C031
Com
S1
24 V 24 V
c Aux
COM
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Remote reset
4 5 8
6
S2
Modbus
A2
A1
Basic schemes (continued)
Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)

Control by communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51

With local control
AS-Interface Module
ASILUF C5
or ASILUF C51
AS-Interface Module
OA3
OA1
Com
AS-Interface
AS-Interface line
Normal
A1
A2
or ASILUF C51
ASILUF C5
AS-Interface line
Adjustment
A2
OA3
OA1
Com
AS-Interface
A1

With local control
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface Module
AS-Interface
OA3
OA1
AS-Interface
Com
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil
5
AS-Interface line
AS-Interface line
Adjustment
A1
Normal
A2

With multifunction control unit LUCM
AS-Interface Module
A2
OA3
OA1
Com
AS-Interface
A1
AS-Interface line
9
LUCM
D(B)
D(A)
GND
RJ45
24 V Aux
4 5 8
6
10
Bus Modbus
RS 485
1/121
Reversing
Reversing starter-controllers LUB

2-wire control
via 3-position switch
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
5/L3
LU2B
A2
B1
A3
A1
A2
B1
A1
A3
B3
LU2B
B3
3/L2
1/L1
Start
forward running
6/T3
4/T2
V1 4/T2
U1 2/T1
Stop
forward running
and reverse
running
forward running
Stop
reverse running
Stop
forward running
Start
reverse running
Stop
reverse running
W1 6/T3
2/T1
Control Unit
M
3
Control by communication modules ASILUF C5

and ASILUF C51
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches

With multifunction control unit LUCM
AS-Interface Module
LU2B
6
Stop forward
running
and reverse
running
D(B)
D(A)
GND
LUCM
24 V Aux
4 5 8
6
Bus Modbus
RS 485
Control by communication modules ASILUF C5

and ASILUF C51
With running direction pilot lights and limit switches
OA3
OA1
ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface Module
Com
A1
B3
A3
A2
Reverser
Motor
Controller
LU2B
B1
AS-Interface
AS-Interface line
10
53
54
81
84
82
1/122
Stop
Limit switch
reverse running reverse running
Start
forward running
Start
reverse running
A2
B1
A1
A3
Stop
Limit switch
forward running forward running
AS-Interface line
B3
AS-Interface
LU9M RC
Pre wired coil
Reversing
Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued)

Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control
LI2
LO1
LI1
OA3
OA1
24 V
c
24 V
Aux COM
4 5 8
6
Modbus
Adjustment
Start
forward running
Start
reverse running
Normal
Start reverse
running
5/L3
3/L2
Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M

1/L1
Modbus
Normal
Adjustment
Start forward
running
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Modbus Module
LULC 033
Com
A2
B1
A1
B3
4 5 8
6
Reverser
Motor
Controller
LU2B
A3
24 V Aux
Com
LO1
OA3
OA1
Com
B1
A2
A1
B3
A3
Modbus Module
LUL C031
D(B)
D(A)
GND
Reverser
Motor
Controller
LU2B
5
6/T3
5/L3
W1
6/T3
4/T2
3/L2
V1
4/T2
2/T1
U1
2/T1
1/L1
Control Unit
M
3
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
2-wire control via 3-position switch

A1
A2
A1
S3
S2
S1
A2
B1
A1
B3
22
Reverser Block
LU6M
A2
B1
A1
A3
Stop
Start
reverse running reverse running
S7
S9
B3
Reverser Block
A3
LU6M
21
22
S3
S2
S1
21
Stop
forward running
and reverse
Stop
Start
running
forward running forward running
S5
S6
S8
A2
14
13
10
forward running
Stop
reverse running
1/123
Presentation
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Altistart U01 and TeSys U
536566
Presentation
The Altistart U01 is a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. It is designed
primarily for combinations with TeSys U starter-controllers.
When combined with a TeSys U 1 controller by means of a connector 2, the

Altistart U01 3LVDSRZHURSWLRQZKLFKSURYLGHVWKH6RIWVWDUWVRIWVWRSIXQFWLRQ
The result is a unique, innovative motor starter.
Using the Altistart U01 starter enhances the starting performance of asynchronous
motors by allowing them to start gradually, smoothly and in a controlled manner. It
prevents mechanical shocks, which lead to wear and tear, and limits the amount of
maintenance work and production downtime.
The Altistart U01 limits the starting torque and current peaks on starting, on machines
which do not require a high starting torque.
The Altistart U01 is designed for the following simple applications:

b Conveyors
b Conveyor belts
b Pumps
b Fans
b Compressors
b Automatic doors and gates
b Small cranes
b Belt-driven machines, etc.
3
2
The Altistart U01 is compact and easy to install. It complies with standards IEC/EN
FDUULHV8/&6$&7LFN&&&FHUWLFDWLRQVDQGe marking.
4
5
6
7
b ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units

v Control two phases of the motor power supply to limit the starting current and for
deceleration
v Internal bypass relay
v Motor power ratings ranging from 0.75 kW to 15 kW
v Motor supply voltages ranging from 200 V to 480 V, 50/60 Hz.
An external power supply is required for controlling the starter.
Description
6
9
b Altistart U01 soft start/soft stop units are equipped with:

v A potentiometer for setting the starting time 6
v A potentiometer for setting the deceleration time 8
v A potentiometer for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor
load 7
v 1 green LED 4 to indicate that the unit is switched on
v 1 yellow LED 5 to indicate that the motor is powered at nominal voltage, if it
is connected to the starter
v A connector 9:
- 2 logic inputs for Run/Stop commands
- 1 logic input for the BOOST function
- 1 logic output to indicate the end of starting
- 1 relay output to indicate the starter has a power supply fault or the motor has
reached a standstill at the end of the deceleration stage
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
1/124
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
Soft starters
Description of a TeSys U starter-controller
3OHDVHFRQVXOWWKH7H6\V8VWDUWHUVRSHQYHUVLRQFDWDORJXH
ATSU 01N2pppLT soft start unit functions

b 2-wire control
The run and stop commands are controlled by a single logic input. State 1 of logic
input LI2 controls starting and state 0 controls stopping.
Altistart U01 control terminals

LI1
LI2
+ 24 V
Wiring diagram for 2-wire control
b 3-wire control
The run and stop commands are controlled by 2 different logic inputs.
Stopping is achieved when logic input LI1 opens (state 0).
The pulse on input LI2 is stored until input LI1 opens.
Altistart U01 control terminals
+ 24 V
LI1
LI2
Wiring diagram for 3-wire control
b Starting time
Controlling the starting time means that the time of the voltage ramp applied to the
motor can be adjusted to obtain a gradual starting time, dependent on the motor load.
b Voltage boost function via logic input
Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting
overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction.
When the input is at state 1, the function is active (input connected to the + 24 V) and
WKHVWDUWHUDSSOLHVD[HGYROWDJHWRWKHPRWRUIRUDOLPLWHGWLPHEHIRUHVWDUWLQJ
U
100%
Un
Voltage ramp
50%
Un
Initial voltage
t
200 ms
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal
motor voltage
b End of starting
v Application function for logic output LO1
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units are equipped with an open collector logic
output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal
speed.
10
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/131 to 1/133
1/125
Characteristics
Soft starters
Environmental characteristics
Type of starter
Conformity to standards
ATSU 01N2ppLT
Altistart U01 electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest
international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial
control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

Conducted and radiated
emissions
Harmonics
EMC immunity
Electrostatic discharge
Immunity to radiated radioelectrical interference
Immunity to electrical transients
Voltage/current impulse
Conducted and radiated
emissions
interference caused by radioHOHFWULFDOHOGV
Damped oscillating waves
e marking
CISPR 11 level B, IEC 60947-4-2, level B

IEC 1000-3-2, IEC 1000-3-4
EN 50082-2, EN 50082-1
IEC 61000-4-2 level 3
IEC 61000-4-3 level 3
IEC 61000-4-4 level 4
IEC 61000-4-5 level 3
IEC 61000-4-6 level 3
IEC 61000-4-11
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
Degree of pollution
Shock resistance
Relative humidity
Ambient temperature around
the unit
Storage
Operation

Operating position
Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical
mounting position
C
C
m
IEC 61000-4-12 level 3

The starters carry e marking in accordance with the European low voltage directives
IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
UL, CSA, C-Tick and CCC
IP 20
2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2
1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz, 1 gn from 13 to 150 Hz, conforming to IEC/EN
60068-2-6
15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
595% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3
- 25+ 70 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2
- 10+ 40 without derating, up to 50C with current derating of 2% per C above 40C
1000 without derating (above this, derate the current by 2.2% per additional 100 m)
10
10
Electrical characteristics
Type of starter
Category of use
Conforming to IEC 60947-4-2
Rated operating voltage
3-phase a voltage
Frequency
Output voltage
Control supply voltage
Rated operating current
Adjustable starting time
Adjustable deceleration time
Starting torque
Type of starter
ATSU
Control power supply consumption
Power dissipated
At full load at end of starting
In transient state at 5 times the
rated operating current
Type of starter
Use
I
Starting time
Starting time
Maximum number of cycles per
hour
V
Hz
A
s
s
%
W
W
ATSU 01N2ppLT
Ac-53b
200 - 10% to 480 + 10%
50 - 5% to 60 + 5%
Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage
24 V c, 100 mA 10%
6...32
1...10
1...10
30.... 80% of DOL motor starting torque
01N206LT
01N209LT
01N212LT
01N222LT
01N232LT
24 V c, 65 mA
24 V c, 100 mA
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
61.5
91.5
121.5
222.5
322.5
ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N222LT
ATSU 01N232LT
1
100
1
50
5
20
10
10
Full voltage state or

starter at standstill
t
Operating cycle
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/126
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
5
10
10
5
Soft starters
Electrical characteristics (continued)

Logic input power supply (electrically isolated between power
and control)
+ 24 V, COM
Logic inputs
LI1, LI2, BOOST
Stop, run and boost on start-up functions
24 V 10%
Isolated
Max. current 100 mA
Logic inputs with impedance 27 k:9SRZHUVXSSO\8PD[9
Max. current 8 mA
State 0 if U < 5 V and I < 0.2 mA
State 1 if U > 13 V and I > 0.5 mA
Open collector logic output:
External 24 V power supply (minimum 6 V, maximum 30 V)
Max. current 200 mA
Normally open (N/O) contact
Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for 6 V c
Maximum switching capacity on inductive load (cos M = 0.5 and L/R = 20 ms): 2 A for
250 V a or 30 V c (AC-15)
Maximum operating voltage 440 V
Starter powered up
Nominal voltage reached
Logic output LO1

End of starting signal
Relay output
R1A R1C
LED signalling
Green LED
Yellow LED
Connections (maximum connection capacity and tightening torque)
Flexible wire with cable end

Rigid wire
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
Tightening torque
Flexible wire with cable end

Rigid wire
Tightening torque
1.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
1.92.5
8 AWG
10 AWG
10 AWG
10 AWG
8 AWG
10 AWG
0.52.5
0.51.5
0.51.5
0.51.5
0.52.5
0.51
0.5
14 AWG
16 AWG
16 AWG
16 AWG
14 AWG
17 AWG
Torque characteristics (typical curves)

T
The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in relation to the
supply voltage.
7KHWRUTXHYDULHVLQOLQHZLWKWKHVTXDUHRIWKHYROWDJHDWD[HGIUHTXHQF\7KHJUDGXDOLQFUHDVH
in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up.
U
3 Tn
0,85 U
0,6 U
0,25
Screw connector
Control circuit
Flexible wire without cable
end
Tn
&RQQHFWLRQWRPPVFUHZFODPSV
Power circuit
Flexible wire without cable
end
2 Tn
0,5
Tr
0,75
N/Ns
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/131 to 1/133
1/127
References
Soft starters
Soft start/soft stop units for 0.75 to 15 kW motors

(can be combined with the TeSys U starter-controller)
DF531714
Motor
Motor power (1)
230 V 230 V
kW
HP
400 V
kW
460 V
HP
Starter
Nominal
current
Reference
Weight
kg
3-phase supply voltage: 200480 V 50/60 Hz
3
ATSU 01N222LT
2
3
ATSU 01N206LT
0.340
1.5
2.2
3
ATSU 01N209LT
0.340
2.2
3
5.5
7.5
12
ATSU 01N212LT
0.340
4
5.5
5
7.5
7.5
11
10
15
22
ATSU 01N222LT
0.490
7.5
10
15
20
32
ATSU 01N232LT
0.490
0.75
1.1
1
1.5
1.5
Accessorie
Description
Used for starter
Reference
ATSU 01N2ppLT
VW3 G4104
DF510362
LUBp2BL
Power connector between
ATSU 01N2ppLT and
TeSys U
Weight
kg
0.020
TeSys U starter and soft start unit combinations

Numerous possibilities for combinations and options are offered.
3OHDVHFRQVXOWWKH7H6\V86WDUWHUVRSHQYHUVLRQVSHFLDOLVWFDWDORJXH
6
3
LUCM ppBL
Motor power
Voltage
230 V
400 V
kW/HP
kW
1.5
0.75/1
2.2/3
1.1/1.5
1.5/2
2.2/3
3/
5.5
4/5
7.5
11
5.5/7.5
15
7.5/10
Soft starter
460 V
HP
2
3
7.5
10
15
20
ATSU 01N206LT
ATSU 01N206LT
ATSU 01N209LT
ATSU 01N209LT
ATSU 01N212LT
ATSU 01N212LT
ATSU 01N222LT
ATSU 01N222LT
ATSU 01N232LT
TeSys U
Power base
Control unit (2)
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 32
LUB 32
LUB 32
LUCp 05BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 12BL
LUCp 18BL
LUCp 18BL
LUCp 32BL
LUCp 32BL
Example of a starter-motor combination with:

1 non-reversing power base for DOL starting (LUBp2BL)
2 control unit (LUCM ppBL)
3 power connector (VW3 G4104)
4 Altistart U01soft start/soft stop unit (ATSU 01N2ppLT)
(1) Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL 508.
'HSHQGLQJRQWKHFRQJXUDWLRQRIWKHFKRVHQ7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUUHSODFHWKHp with
A for standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction.
ATSU 01N2ppLT
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/128
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
Dimensions
Soft starters
TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and

TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)

and ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N212LT
Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G4104 connector
Side by side mounting
45
135
124
150
284
154
72,2
99
TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and

TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)

and ATSU 01N222LT to ATSU 01N232LT
Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G4104 connector
135
99
154
72,2
45
314
170
6
9
46,6
10
44,8
28
20
VW3 G4104 connector
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Schemes:
pages 1/130 to 1/133
1/129
Schemes
Soft starters

For 0.75 to 15 kW motors
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units

5/L3
3/L2
1/L1
5/L3
Power wiring with reversing unit

3/L2
Power wiring
1/L1
QF1
QF1
TeSys U
CU
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Tesys U
TeSys U
with
reversing
unit
CU
Tesys U
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
3/L2
5/L3
6/T3
A1
2/T1
M1
3
6/T3
ATSU 01N2ppLT
4/T2
4/T2
2/T1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
1/L1
A1
M1
3
Compatible components)RUIXOOUHIHUHQFHV3OHDVHFRQVXOWRXUFDWDORJXHDQG3OHDVHFRQVXOWRXUFDWDORJXHRUUHIHUWRRXUFDWDORJXH0RWRUVWDUWHU

VROXWLRQV&RQWURODQGSURWHFWLRQFRPSRQHQWV
Code
Description
A1
Soft start/soft stop unit
QF1
TeSys U controller-starter
CU
TeSys U control unit
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/130
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
Schemes (continued)
Soft starters

ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)

Automatic 2-wire control
Without deceleration
c 24 V
c 24 V
A1
LO1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
COM
LI1
R1C
R1A
18
Stop
Run
LO1
BOOST
LI1
LI2
COM
R1C
R1A
18
+ 24 V
LUA1 C20
S1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
17
17
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
LUA1 C20
A1
Stop
Run
S1
S2
A1
A2
QF1
With and without deceleration
A2
QF1
Functional diagrams
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
Logic input LI2

Pushbutton S2
Pushbutton S1
Logic input LI2

Pushbutton S1
Logic output LO1
Logic output LO1
Yellow LED
Yellow LED
U1
U1
10 s
10 s
Motor voltage
Motor voltage
t1
t1
t2
Automatic 3-wire control

With deceleration
c 24 V
c 24 V
A1
A1
A1
14
LO1
LI2
+ 24 V
LI1
R1C
COM
R1A
QF1
14
QF1
A2
A1
QF1
S1
QF1
A2
BOOST
17
18
LO1
+ 24 V
COM
LI2
S2
13
ATSU 01N2ppLT
LUA1 C20
13
S2
LI1
R1C
R1A
18
S1
BOOST
17
ATSU 01N2ppLT
LUA1 C20
Functional diagrams
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
Power supply
voltage
Green LED
500 ms
Pushbutton S1
Logic input LI2

Pushbutton S2
Pushbutton S2
Logic input LI1

Pushbutton S1
Logic input LI2

Logic output LO1
Logic output LO1
U1
Yellow LED
Yellow LED
10 s
Motor voltage
10 s
Motor voltage
t1
t1
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

S1, S2: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter
t1: Acceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
t2: Deceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
U1: Starting time can be controlled by a potentiometer
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
10
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
1/131
Schemes (continued)
Soft starters


Automatic 3-wire control, with reversing unit
With deceleration
Run
direction 2
Run
direction 1
S1
Run
direction 1
S1
Run
direction 2
S2
S2
Stop
S3
Stop
S3
17
17
LUA1 C20
18
18
LUA1 C20
+
c 24 V
c 24 V
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit

S1, S2, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
S3: minimum depression time 500 ms

S1, S2, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
Boost on starting and end of starting signal

A1
LO1
BOOST
LI2
+ 24 V
LI1
COM
R1C
R1A
ATSU 01N2ppLT
To PLC
7
10
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
1/132
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
References:
page 1/128
Dimensions:
page 1/129
LO1
+ 24 V
BOOST
LI2
LI1
R1A
ATSU 01N2ppLT
A2
B1
A1
B3
BOOST
LO1
LI2
+ 24 V
LI1
COM
R1C
R1A
A2
A1
LU2B p2BL
ATSU 01N2ppLT
B1
A1
B3
A3
LU2B p2BL
QF1
A1
COM
QF1
R1C
A3
Schemes (continued)
Soft starters


Automatic control with Modbus communication module, with and without deceleration
A1
c 24 V 24 V Aux.
D(B)
D(A)
Gnd
LO1
COM
OA3
COM
OA1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
4 5 8
LI1
COM
R1A
c 24 V 24 V Aux.
D(B)
D(A)
Gnd
LO1
COM
LO1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
Modbus Module
LUL C031
ATSU 01N2ppLT
4 5 8
13
LI1
COM
R1C
Modbus Module
LUL C031
ATSU 01N2ppLT
A1
A1
R1C
A1
R1A
With reversing unit
LO1
Without reversing unit
c 24 V
14
+
c 24 V
QF1
Value
0
Automatic control without deceleration

Run
700
0
Stop
704
0
Automatic control with deceleration
Run
700
0
Soft stop
700
0
1
0
1
0
3
A2
B1
A1
B3
A3
LU2B p2BL
Function
Register
Bit
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU
704
0
Function
Register
Bit
Value
Powering up TeSys U and ATSU
Forward
704
0
1
Reverse
704
1
1
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU
Forward
704
0
0
Reverse
704
1
0
Automatic control without deceleration
Run
700
0
1
Stop forward
704
0
0
Stop reverse
704
1
0
Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse)
Run
700
0
1
Soft stop
700
0
0
Automatic control with AS-Interface communication module, without deceleration

Without reversing unit
With reversing unit

A1
A1
LO1
BOOST
+ 24 V
LI2
R1C
COM
R1A
LI1
COM
OA1
ASI LUFC5
A2
B1
A1
A3
c 24 V AS-Interface
LU9B N11C
+
Pre-wired coil +
B3
LU2B p2BL
OA3
BOOST
LO1
QF1
14
ASI LUFC5
ATSU 01N2ppLT
13
+ 24 V
LI2
LI1
COM
R1C
R1A
ATSU 01N2ppLT
c 24 V AS-Interface
c 24 V
c 24 V
9
Function
Bit
Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run
D0
1
Stop
D0
0
Presentation:
pages 1/124 and 1/125
Characteristics:
pages 1/126 and 1/127
Function
Bit
Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run forward
D0
1
Stop
D0
0
Run reverse
D1
1
Stop
D1
0
References:
page 1/128
10
Dimensions:
page 1/129
1/133
Presentation,
description,
references

Magnetic control unit for the protection of
variable speed controllers and soft start units
Presentation
S1 (mm2 / AWG)
When installed upstream of a variable speed controller or soft start unit,

control unit LUCLpp, used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base,
provides:
v isolation,
v short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
(variable speed controller-based or soft start unit-based motor starters).
2
Note: control unit LUCL, when used in conjunction with power base LUB 12 or
LUB 32, conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
S2 (mm2 / AWG)
LUB pp
LUCLpp
Installation regulations
When the length of the cable between the TeSys U starter and the variable speed
controller is more than 1.5 m, the c.s.a. of the cable between the variable speed
controller and the TeSys U starter (S2) must be equal to the c.s.a. of the cable
upstream of TeSys U (S1).
3
Altivar or Altistart
568027
Description
1
2
1
2
3
4

Dial for magnetic adjustment of motor In
Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover
References
Description
Line current of the

variable speed controller
or soft start unit
Reference
A
Magnetic control unit
kg
0.150.6
LUCLX6pp
0.351.4
LUCL1Xpp
0.135
1.255
LUCL05pp
0.135
312
LUCL12pp
0.135
LUCL18pp
0.135
832
LUCL32pp
0.135
24
4872
BL (2), (3)
110240
c or a
ES (4)
FU (5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.

(4) c: 4872 V, a: 48 V.
(5) c: 110220 V, a: 110240 V.
10
1/134
0.135
4.518
(1) Standard control circuit voltage:
Volts
Weight
(1)
Selection

Magnetic control unit for the protection of
variable speed controllers and soft start stop units
Control unit and associated power base selection

Functions provided
Maximum motor
power ratings 50/60 Hz
b Short-circuit protection
b Manual reset
Power base
reference
Control unit
reference
Line current
< 400/415 V
500 V
690 V
KW
KW
KW
0.09
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCLX6pp
0.150.6
0.25
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCL1Xpp
0.351.4
1.5
2.2
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCL05pp
1.255
5.5
5.5
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUCL12pp
312
7.5
15
LUB 32
LUCL18pp
4.518
15
15
18.5
LUB 32
LUCL32pp
832
Control units
Standard
Advanced
LUCA
LUCB
Multifunction
LUCC
LUCD
LUCL
LUCM
Thermal overload protection

Over current protection
14.2 x the setting current
14.2 x the max. current
3 to 17 x the setting
current
Protection against phase loss

Earth fault protection (equipment protection only)

Tripping class
10
10
20
Motor type
3-phase
Single-phase
3-phase
530
Single-phase and 3-phase
Thermal overload test function

Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting time
Reset method
Manual
Automatic or remote
With function module, or parameters can

be set via the bus with a communication
module (see page 1/68).
Integrated function

via the bus with a
communication module
(see page 1/68).
Function provided with accessory
Compatibility
Compatibility of
control unit LUCLpp with
References
Functions
The starter-controller
Yes
LUB 12/LUB 32 Starter-controller (magnetic protection)
The starter
No
LUS 12/LUS 32 Starter without either magnetic or thermal overload protection)
The controller
No
LUT M
Controller (without thermal overload protection)
Add-on contact blocks

with fault signalling
and auxiliary contacts
Yes
LUA 1C11
Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (1 N/O + 1 N/C)
LUA 1C20
Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (2 N/O)
LUF N20
Auxiliary contacts (2 N/O)
Communication
modules
Function modules
Yes
No
LUF N11
Auxiliary contacts (1 N/O + 1 N/C)
LUF N02
Auxiliary contacts (2 N/C)
ASILUF C5 and AS-Interface communication modules

ASILUF C51
LUF C00
LUL C033
Modbus communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
LUL C031
Modbus communication module (1 output)
LUL C15
Advantys STB communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
LUL C08
CANopen communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
LUL C09
DeviceNet communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
LUL C07
3UREXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHRXWSXWLQSXWV
LUF W10
Alarm function module
LUF DH11
Thermal overload signalling module with manual reset
LUF DA01
Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/C)
LUF DA10
Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/O)
LUF V2
Motor load indication module
10
1/135
Characteristics

Characteristics of magnetic control unit LUCL
Protection
Motor type
3-phase
When used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base, magnetic control
unit LUCL conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
Tripping threshold
14.2 x In (max. setting current)
Tripping tolerance
20 %
Environment
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
CE
When used in conjunction an LUB power base, control unit LUCL conforms to
standard 60947-2.
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1,

690
Rated impulse withstand

voltage (Uimp)
kV
Safety separation of circuits

SELV

appendix N
Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 40
Front panel outside connection
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against
Front panel and wired terminals
GLUHFWQJHUFRQWDFW
Other faces
IP 20
IP 20
7+
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068

Conforming to/EN 60068-2-30

around the device
IP 40
Cycles 12
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h
48
Storage
- 40+ 85
Operation
Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25 + 70.

(At temperatures above 60C and up to 70C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap of
9 mm between products).
Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25+ 60.

(At temperatures above 45 C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 C up to 60 C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.)
Operating positions
In relation to normal vertical

mounting plane
Flame resistance
Conforming to UL 94
2000
960 (parts supporting live components)
650
V2
Environmental restrictions
Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable
Shock resistance
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms
(1)
5300 Hz

(1)
Resistance to
kV
kV
On contact: 8 - Level 4
Immunity to radiated highfrequency disturbance
V/m
10 - Level 3
Immunity to
fast transient currents
kV
All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4
kV
Serial link: 2 - Level 3
Immunity to dissipated
shock waves
Common mode
Serial mode
kV
10
Uc a 24240 V,
Uc c 48220 V
Power poles closed: 15 gn

Power poles closed: 4 gn (2)
Uc = 24 V c
10
high-frequency disturbance
In open air: 8 - Level 3
Not applicable
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
1/136
Characteristics

Power bases and LUCL magnetic control unit
Power base and control unit type
LUB 12 + LUCL
LUB 32 + LUCL
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
1.92.5
2.510
1.56
16
16
110
16
Power circuit connection characteristics

Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Flexible cable
without cable end
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
N.m
1.92.5
Control circuit connection characteristics

Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Flexible cable
without cable end
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
1 conductor
2 conductors
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
N.m
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.81.2
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.341.5
0.341.5
0.751.5
0.751.5
0.81.2

Rated control
circuit voltage
Voltage limits
Operation
Drop-out
Typical consumption
I max while closing
I rms sealed
Heat dissipation
Operating time
Resistance to micro-breaks
Resistance to voltage dips
a 50/60 Hz
c
c 24 V (1)
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V
c 110240 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
c 24 V
a 24 V
a or c 4872 V
a 110240 V, c 110220 V
Closing
Opening
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
W
ms
ms
ms
IEC/EN 61000-4-11
In operating cycles per hour
24240
24220
2027
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
c 88242
14.5
14.5
29
55
130
140
280
280
60
70
35
35
2
99u 72 V: 50
35
3
At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms
15
3600
24240
24220
2027
2026.5
a 38.572. c 38.593
a 88264
c 88242
14.5
14.5
29
55
220
220
280
280
80
90
45
25
3
99u 72 V: 50
35
3
3
Yes
SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN
12
y 70 C: 12 A
y 70 C: 12 A
3
Yes
SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN
32
y 70 C: 32 A
y 70 C: 32 A
690 (3)
4060
3
6
0.1 0.3
690 (3)
4060
15
3600
Main pole characteristics

Number of poles
Isolation
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Rated thermal current
Rated operational current
(Ue y 440 V)
Possible
Padlocking
A
Conforming
to IEC/ EN
60947-2
Category AC-41
Category AC-43

Frequency limits
Power dissipated
in the power circuits
Of the operating current

Operational current
Power dissipated
in all three poles
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit
Total breaking time
Thermal limit
With Isc max on 440 V
V
Hz
A
W
9
0.6
12
1.1
18
2.4
25
4.6
32
7.5
V
230
440
500
600
kA
50
50
10
4
ms
2
2
2
kA2s
90
(2) No consumption sealed.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.
10
120
1/137
Combinations

Coordination
7KHVWDQGDUGGHQHVWHVWVDWGLIIHUHQWOHYHOVRIFXUUHQWWKHSXUSRVHRIWKHVHWHVWVLV
to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
7KHVWDQGDUGGHQHVW\SHVRIFRRUGLQDWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQGLWLRQRIWKH
components after testing: type 1 and type 2
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
The product combinations given below provide type 1 coordination

.
Soft start-soft stop unit/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection
526113
526112
TeSys U / Altistart 48: type 1 coordination
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
(protection + power switching)
Soft start unit reference

Class 10
Class 20
5.5
LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18
ATS48D17
7.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATS48D17
ATS48D22
11
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATS48D22
ATS48D32
15
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATS48D32
ATS48D38
Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection
526114
526112
TeSys U / Altivar 21 UL Type 1/IP 20: type 1 coordination

Power
400 V (kW)
0.75
TeSys U references
Variable speed controller reference
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV21H075N4
ATV21HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21HU22N4
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21HU30N4
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21HU40N4
5.5
ATV21HU55N4
7.5
ATV21HU75N4
11
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21HD11N4
15
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21HD15N4
526115
526112
TeSys U / Altivar 21 IP 54: type 1 coordination
8
+
10
1/138
Power
400 V (kW)
TeSys U references
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV21W075N4/N4C
1.5
ATV21WU15N4/N4C
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21WU22N4/N4C
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21WU30N4/N4C
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV21WU40N4/N4C
5.5
ATV21WU55N4/N4C
7.5
ATV21WU75N4/N4C
11
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21WD11N4/N4C
15
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV21WD15N4/N4C
Combinations

526116
526112
Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection (continued)
Power
400 V (kW)
526117
526112
TeSys U references
0.37
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV31H037N4
0.55
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV31H055N4
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV31H075N4
1.1
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV31HU11N4
1.5
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV31HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV31HU22N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV31HU30N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV31HU40N4
5.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV31HU55N4
7.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV31HU75N4
526118
526112
TeSys U references
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV61H075N4
1.5
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV61HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV61HU22N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV61HU30N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV61HU40N4
5.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV61HU55N4
7.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV61HU75N4

Power
400V (kW)

Power
400V (kW)
TeSys U references
0.75
LUB12 + LUCL05
ATV71H075N4
1.5
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV71HU15N4
2.2
LUB12 + LUCL12
ATV71HU22N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV71HU30N4
LUB32 + LUCL18
ATV71HU40N4
5.5
LUB32 + LUCL32
ATV71HU55N4
10
1/139
General

integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers
526454
integral 63: a high performance concept

for reliability of operation
integral 63 contactor breakers combine all the functions of a power switching

assembly up to 63 A in a single compact device, with performance equivalent to that
of the best separate specialist devices.
They conform to the main standards currently in force, in particular IEC 60947-1,
IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-3, IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2 (welding of power
poles impossible), as well as to international approvals UL, CSA, and the
European directives.
The integral range ensures reliability of operation up to 63 A. In addition to safety of
operation, integral has numerous other functions: increased protection,
FRPPXQLFDWLRQUHPRWHFRQWUROIDXOWLGHQWLFDWLRQLVRODWLRQSDGORFNLQJ
3
Functions performed by integral 63
units
The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions:

b power switching,
b isolation,
b overload protection,
b short-circuit protection.
These functions are traditionally performed by separate devices which must be
combined to form a motor starter assembly, the most common being:
v fuses + contactor + thermal overload relay,
v circuit breaker + contactor + thermal overload relay.
Power switching
526324
Contactor (for automatic and remote control)

b Operational power for use in category AC-43:
v up to 30 kW at 400/415 V 50 Hz,
v up to 33 kW at 440/415 V 50 Hz.
b Electrical life in number of operating cycles, in category AC-43, at 415 V and at
rated power: 1.2 million.
b Mechanical life in number of operating cycles: 5 million.
7
526325
Reversing pairs
Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted:
b mechanically interlocked.
&DQEHWWHGZLWKWKHVDPHSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHVDVLQWHJUDOFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHU
10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/140
Dimensions, schemes:
pages 1/174 to 1/177
General (continued)

Functions performed by integral 63

units (continued)
Isolation
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947
integral 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions conforming
to standards IEC 60947.
,QDGGLWLRQLQWHJUDO/'FRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQG/'UHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRU
EUHDNHUVLQFRUSRUDWHVSHFLFSROHVIRUFRQWUROWHVWLQJDQGSDGORFNLQJ
Overload protection
534529
Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and

overcurrent)
A range of interchangeable modules allows the equipment to be adapted to suit:
b the rated operational current (rating and settings),
b the application:
v motors,
v frequent starting motors,
v distribution circuits.
526327
High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker

For short-circuit protection.
High breaking capacity with short-circuit limited by ultra-fast tripping.

Possibility of increasing the breaking capacity of the integral unit by adding a current
limiter (LA9 LB920).
7KHFXUUHQWOLPLWHULVWWHGXSVWUHDPRIWKHLQWHJUDOXQLW
6HYHUDOLQWHJUDOXQLWVPD\EHWWHGGRZQVWUHDPRIWKHFXUUHQWOLPLWHU
(Ith = 63 A, Ie = 32 A).
526328
Signalling and attachments
These devices provide comprehensive local signalling:

b pole position indicator,
b GLIIHUHQWVLJQDOOLQJIRURYHUORDGDQGVKRUWFLUFXLW
They also allow dialogue with the automated control system by means of numerous
add-on blocks:
b auxiliary contact and signalling blocks,
b remote electrical reset device,
b undervoltage and shunt trips,
b control circuit switching,
b etc.
6LPSOH[LQJDQGFDEOLQJPHWKRGV
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
LQWHJUDOFRQWUDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQGUHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVWRQWRPP7
rails using a separate mounting plate.
integral units can also be mounted on:
b panels,
b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P,
b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts,
b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly,
combining safety and simplicity of use),
b AK5 panel busbar systems.
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/141
10
Terminology

Terminology
Altitude
7KHUDUHHGDWPRVSKHUHDWKLJKDOWLWXGHUHGXFHVWKHGLHOHFWULFVWUHQJWKRIWKHDLUDQG
hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the
cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor
breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time).
No derating is necessary up to 3000 m.

Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage
and current (a.c. supply) are as follows:
Altitude
3500 m
0.90
0.92
4000 m
0.80
0.90
4500 m
0.70
0.88
5000 m
0.60
0.86

The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The
operating characteristics are given:
b with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 C.
b with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 C.
Rated operational current (Ie)

7KLVLVGHQHGWDNLQJLQWRDFFRXQWWKHUDWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJHRSHUDWLQJUDWHDQG
duty, utilisation category and air temperature around the device.
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1)

The current Ith which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a minimum of 8
hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards.
Short time rating
The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a
period of no load, without dangerous overheating.
This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current,
determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the
corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is
expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational
voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.
The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics
are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form
(less than 5% total harmonic distortion).
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

7KLVLVWKHYROWDJHYDOXHXVHGWRGHQHWKHLQVXODWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDGHYLFHDQG
referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As
WKHVSHFLFDWLRQVDUHQRWLGHQWLFDOIRUDOOVWDQGDUGVWKHUDWHGYDOXHVJLYHQIRUHDFK
of them are not necessarily the same.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

This is the highest peak value of an impulse voltage, of prescribed form and polarity,
ZKLFKWKHGHYLFHLVDEOHWRZLWKVWDQGZLWKRXWIDLOXUHXQGHUVSHFLHGWHVWFRQGLWLRQV
and to which isolation clearance values are referred.
The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or higher than the
values stated for the transient overvoltages appearing in the circuit in which the
GHYLFHLVWWHG
Note: WKHVHGHQLWLRQVDUHEDVHGRQH[WUDFWVIURPVWDQGDUG,(&
(1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.
10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/142
Dimensions, schemes :
pages 1/174 to 1/177
Terminology (continued)

Rated operational power (expressed in kW)

The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor
breaker, at the stated operational voltage.
Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1)

This is the current value which the contactor breaker can break in accordance with
WKHEUHDNLQJFRQGLWLRQVVSHFLHGLQWKH,(&VWDQGDUG
Rated making capacity (1)
This is the current value which the contactor breaker can make in accordance with
WKHPDNLQJFRQGLWLRQVVSHFLHGLQWKH,(&VWDQGDUG
On-load factor (m)

t
7KLVLVWKHUDWLREHWZHHQWKHWLPHWKHFXUUHQWRZVWDQGWKHGXUDWLRQRIWKHF\FOH7
t
m = --T
T
&\FOHGXUDWLRQGXUDWLRQRIFXUUHQWRZWLPHDW]HURFXUUHQW
Pole impedance
The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components
between the input terminal and the output terminal.
The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component

X = LZ). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally
given for 50 Hz. The average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current.
Electrical durability
This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts
can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation
category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.
7KLVLVWKHDYHUDJHQXPEHURIQRORDGRSHUDWLQJF\FOHVLHZLWK]HURFXUUHQWRZ
through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical
failure.
Coordination
The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a
short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor
and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in
plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection
of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current.
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or
the replacement of parts.
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact
welding is permissible if they can be easily separated.
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2
In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the
equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any
maintenance.
Note: WKHVHGHQLWLRQVDUHEDVHGRQH[WUDFWVIURPVWDQGDUG,(&
(1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of
the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum
asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak
asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/143
10

'HQLWLRQ
1
Reminder of standards IEC 60947
2
Standards for contactor breakers
7KHVWDQGDUGXWLOLVDWLRQFDWHJRULHVGHQHWKHFXUUHQWYDOXHVZKLFKWKHFRQWDFWRU
breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on:
b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting
or running, reversing, plugging.
b IEC 60947-1: general rules,
b IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers,
b IEC 60947-3: isolating devices,
b IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters,
b IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units,
b IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,
IEC 60947-4-1
Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It
concerns:
b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose
rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for
d.c. applications,
b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection
devices,
b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices
and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection
devices,
b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own shortcircuit protection device.
IEC 60947-6-2
Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment.
It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with
main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is
less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications.
Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the
SURWHFWLRQRIUHPRWHO\FRQWUROOHGFLUFXLWVIXQFWLRQWKH\FDQDOVRSHUIRUPRWKHU
functions, such as isolation.
After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the
FXUUHQWVFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKHVSHFLHGXWLOLVDWLRQFDWHJRULHVDQGWRWKH
QXPEHURIRSHUDWLQJF\FOHVVSHFLHGLQWKHVWDQGDUGZLWKRXWIDLOLQJ7KLV
series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests.
6WDQGDUG,(&VSHFLHVWKDWLQWKHHYHQWRIDVKRUWFLUFXLWQRGDPDJH
or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor
starter.
The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of
operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly
without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-1
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos M y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-2
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
times the rated current of the motor.
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to
the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-3
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
b 2QRSHQLQJLWEUHDNVWKHUDWHGFXUUHQWGUDZQE\WKHPRWRUDWWKLVSRLQWWKH
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
10
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
1/144
pages 1/174 to 1/177

Standards for contactor breakers
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications (continued)

Category AC-4
(continued)
This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Category AC-41
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos M y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution.

Category AC-42
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal
to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-43
7KLVFDWHJRU\DSSOLHVWRVTXLUUHOFDJHPRWRUVZLWKEUHDNLQJZKLOHPRWRUUXQQLQJ
inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of
operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
b 2QRSHQLQJLWEUHDNVWKHUDWHGFXUUHQWGUDZQE\WKHPRWRUDWWKLVSRLQWWKH
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
Category AC-44
This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or
slip ring motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Tripping classes of protection modules

The creation of thermal tripping classes allows better adaptation of the thermal
protection to suit different motor and application technologies (short or long starting
times). Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2.
Class
Tripping time at 7.2 Ir (1)
Standards for auxiliary contacts
10 A
210 s
10
410 s
20
620 s
30
930 s
IEC 60947-5
Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control
circuits.
It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.

Category AC-15 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
Utilisation categories for d.c. applications

Category DC-13 (3)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time
taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the
power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W).
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current.
(2) Replaces category AC-11.
(3) Replaces category DC-11.
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
10
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/145
Equipment selection
for starters

When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for
determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment.
In particular:
b permissible currents for the conductors,
b maximum voltage drops,
b short-circuit protection,
b protection against indirect contact.
The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit.
The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all
European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection
against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to
the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned.
Cable protection against overload

To achieve this, the thermal setting value Irth selected must be greater than the
current drawn IB and less than or equal to the permissible current Iz in the cable to
be protected.
IB < Irth y Iz
Breaking capacity rule
Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than
the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed.
BC u Isc max
Breaking time rule

FRQGLWLRQVPXVWEHIXOOOHG
b The short-circuit current at the end of the circuit, Isc min, must be greater than or
equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the device,
b The short-circuit current at the start of the circuit, Isc max, must be such that:
I2sc max tm y I2oto
I2oto = permissible thermal stress limit for the circuit,

tm = operating time of the integral unit or of the short-circuit
protection device.
These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used.
Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand
Isc max = 50 kA.
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes

TN multiple earthed neutral scheme
PEN
B'
C'
TNC scheme
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
Neutral is connected to earth.

The earths are connected to neutral.
Any phase/earth insulation fault causes a short-circuit.
$VFRQWDFWYROWDJHLVGDQJHURXVEUHDNLQJPXVWRFFXUDWWKHUVWIDXOW
The PE conductor and the neutral conductor may be:
combined (TNC scheme),
separate (TNS scheme).
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/146
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
pages 1/174 to 1/177
Equipment selection
for starters

Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued)

b Protection against indirect contact (TN schemes), for dead shorts only, requires
WKDWWKHIROORZLQJFRQGLWLRQVEHIXOOOHGVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
v The fault current Id must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required
for magnetic tripping of the integral unit, i.e. 1.12 Irth max.
c FRHIFLHQWWDNLQJLQWRDFFRXQWWKHXSVWUHDPSDUWRIWKH
fault loop impedance assumed to be equal to 0.8, unless
otherwise indicated.
q FRHIFLHQWGHSHQGHQWRQWKHHDUWKFRQQHFWLRQVFKHPH
and equal to 1 in the TN scheme.
Uo = phase-neutral voltage in volts.
Zb = fault loop impedance in m:/m such that:
Zb z R (fault loop resistance).
L = length of the fault loop equal to twice the length Lc of the
circuit.
S = Sph, c.s.a of the phase conductors = SPE = c.s.a. of the
protective conductors.
U = resistivity of the copper = 0.0225.
= ratio between the magnetic tripping current and the
maximum setting current of the instantaneous thermal
tripping device.
Uo
Id = c.q.___
Zb
L
Lc
R = U __ = 2 U ___
S
S
v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined
by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping
zone.
7KLVFRQGLWLRQLVJHQHUDOO\IXOOOHGIRUSRZHUVXSSOLHVRI9
(In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for UL = 25 V,
a tm y 110 ms would be required).
7KHUVWFRQGLWLRQDOORZVXVWRFDOFXODWHWKHPD[LPXPOHQJWKRIWKHFLUFXLWWRSURYLGH
protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme.
For the TN scheme:
c.q.Uo.Sph
__________
Ly
2U.1. Irth
0.8 x Uo x Sph
i.e. L max = _______________________
2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 Irth max
Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme

C.s.a.
mm2
1.5
2.5
10
16
25
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Irth max.
A
10
16
10
16
25
32
16
25
32
40
25
32
40
50
32
40
50
63
32
40
50
63
32
40
50
63
=3
m
180
112
298
186
118
92
296
190
148
118
284
222
178
142
370
296
236
188
590
472
378
300
922
738
590
468
=6
m
90
56
149
93
59
46
148
95
74
59
142
111
89
71
185
148
118
94
295
236
189
150
461
369
295
234
= 12
m
45
28
75
47
32
23
74
48
37
30
71
56
45
36
93
74
59
47
148
118
95
75
281
185
148
117
= 15
m
36
22
60
37
60
10
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/147
Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability

Selection for a temperature T y 40 C

220/240
400/415
440
480/525
600/690
Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)

integral 63
63
63
63
63
63
33
37
55
Rated operational powers (for standard motors)

integral 63
kW
15
33
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V
b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-4-1,

b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-6-2.

20
10
8
6
5
4
(63 A)
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
1
1,5
2 3 45 79
20
6 8 10
40 60 80 150 200
63 100160 300
Current broken in A
1 Not having previously broken a short-circuit current

2 Having broken a short-circuit current 10 times at 30 Ie (most common values of
short-circuit current during operation)
7
Current
breaking
limit
AC-3
AC-43
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/148
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
pages 1/174 to 1/177
AC-2
AC-42
Selection according to
utilisation category and
required electrical
durability

a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43

Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
integral 63
With cable c.s.a.

16 mm2
T y 40 C
63
T y 55 C
55
T y 70 C
50
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41

Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour
integral 63
Operating cycles/h
On-load
factor 85 %
Operation
at Ie max
1200
Operation
at 0.5 Ie
2400
On-load
factor 25 %
Operation
at Ie max
1800
Electrical durability Ue y 415 V

20
10
8
6
5
4
(63 A)
2
1,5
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
20
40
63 80 100
60
Current broken in A
Note: IRUXVHLQFDWHJRU\$&SOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2IFH
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/149
Characteristics

Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Type
integral 63
Number of poles
Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3
In AC-3 at 400 V
Mechanical durability at Uc
a
at ambient temperature y 55 C c with converter
A
V
Environment
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
around the device
Permissible acceleration
Operation
Storage
c Operation
(1) Storage
5100 Hz
C
C
C
C
Shock resistance
Permissible acceleration
Impulse duration: 11 ms
Conforming to IEC 60144 & 60529

Conforming to VDE 0106
Flame resistance

Operating positions
(without derating)
Without derating
In relation to normal
vertical mounting plane
IEC: 158-1, 204-1, 204-2, 364, 947-1/2 and 4

UTE: NF C 63-110, C 63-120, C 63-130, C 63-650, C 79-100, C 20-040
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 5424, 4752, 4941
NEN, NBN
ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL
NEMKO, NKK, VE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS
7+
- 20+ 60
- 40+ 80
- 25+ 50
- 25+ 70
Energised state: 3 gn
De-energised state: 3 gn
Energised state: 8 gn
De-energised state: 8 gn
IP 20B
3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVWGLUHFWQJHUFRQWDFW
Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and decree of 22-12-81
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982)
Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072
3000
From main axis
(left-right tilt)

Rated control circuit voltage
(Uc)
3
63
690
1.2 million operating cycles
5 million operating cycles
3600 operating cycles/hour
600 operating cycles/hour
Voltage limits
at T y 55 C
Average consumption
at 20 C and at Uc
Heat dissipation
Operating time (2)
at 20 C and at Uc
a 50 Hz
a 60 Hz
c with converter
Operation
Drop-out
a
Inrush
Sealed
c (1)
Inrush
Sealed
a 50/60 Hz
c with
converter
&
2
&
2
V
V
V
VA
VA
W
W
W
ms
ms
ms
ms
24660
24600
24, 48, 110
0.851.1 Uc
0.250.7 Uc
375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
300 for 50 ms
8
8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz)
1235
720
2540
1525
(1) With converter.

(2) The closing time C is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles.
The opening time O is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the
moment the main poles separate.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/150
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/1711/1741/174
Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/174 to 1/177
Characteristics

Contactor breakers
Type
integral 63
Pole characteristics
Frequency limits
of the operational current
Rated impulse
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Heat dissipation in the power
circuits of the contactor breaker
and its protection module
Rated making capacity
I rms
I peak
Rated breaking capacity
conforming to
IEC 60947-2
conforming to IEC
60947-6-2 ensuring
reliability of operation
Total breaking time
Electrical durability in AC-3
at Ie max and at 415 V
after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc
Thermal limit
T y 40 C
A
Hz
63
4060
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV
Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V

Operational current
A
Power per pole, hot state
W
690
25
4.4
Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A

Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA
12 or 15 x Ith (above this value. the breaker trips)

105
Operational voltage
Value of cosM
Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1)
Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1)
Icu = Ics
Prospective rms
short-circuit current at
terminals of a new device
With Isc max.
at 415 V, 50 Hz
Tightening torque
40
5.8
50
7
63
9
220/240
0.25
kA rms 50
kA rms 50
kA rms 50
380/415
0.25
50
50
50
440
0.25
50
50
50
480/525
0.25
35
35
30
600/690
0.5
10
10
10
ms
kA
4
3
10
25
35
50
1
300 x 103
0.9
0.6
0.5
0.2
A2s
mm2
Maximum c.s.a.
1 x 50 or 2 x 35
Minimum c.s.a.
1x6
mm2
2 x 25
1x6
mm2
N.m
1 x 50
6
1x6
Cabling
Flexible cable
without cable end
Flexible cable
with cable end
Solid cable
32
5
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules

Module type
Protection
Thermal protection
Magnetic protection
conforming to
IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2
Number of poles
Number of protected poles
Max. continuous current
Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.)
Protection against
phase imbalance
Tripping class
Instantaneous trip current
setting range
V
A
A
C
LB1 LD03P
Standard motors
NF C 63-650
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
- 20+ 60
With
LB1 LD03M
Standard motors
NF C 63-650
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
20+ 60
With
LB6 LD03M
Frequent starting
NF C 63-650
3
3
690
1363
20+ 60
Without
20
20
Fixed at 15 Irth max 612 Irth max (usual 612 Irth max
setting
910 Irth maxi)
20 %
20 %
20 %
Tripping tolerance
LB1 LD03L
Distribution circuits
NF C 63-120
3
3
690
1363
10/1345/63
20+ 60
Without
V
Operating cycles
20 %
IEC 60947
690
10 000
%\RUSDGORFNVPPVKDQN
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility

Padlocking
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Operating cycles
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
36 Irth max
Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility

Padlocking
IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113

V
690
10 000
RUSDGORFNVVKDQNPPPD[DQGPPPLQ:KHQXVKPRXQWLQJ
interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open),
t: time
CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open)
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/151
10

Contactor breakers
Add-on current limiter and auxiliary contacts
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 Lpp

Switching capacity
Rated
a category
operational
AC-15 (1)
power
Making capacity
Rated
c category
operational
DC-13 (2)
power
Making capacity
Cabling
A
V
6
690
mVA
V
VA
VA
VA
V
W
W
W
mm2
600
48
110/127
300
500
160
300
1500
3500
24
48
120
90
70
50
800
700
Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
A
V
V
6
690
125
mm2
Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5
A
V
3
250
V
VA
VA
VA
VA
V
W
W
W
W
mm2
24
48
100
100
50
50
75
75
75
75
Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
220/240
600
330
6000
110
75
38
400
380/415
520
300
7500
220
68
33
260
110/127
600
90
875
160
110/125
50
6
50
6
220
750
125
500
200
200
50
7.5
50
7.5
440
500
280
7000
440
61
28
220
Isolating auxiliary contacts LA1 LC03p

and NF C 63-130
Cabling
a.c. supply
d.c. supply
Signalling contacts LA1 LC001

Operational power
for 200 000 operating cycles
5
c
Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA
Voltage
a category AC-15
Voltage
c category DC-13
Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
Voltage
Resistive load
Lamp load (3)
Inductive load (4)
Motor (5)
Voltage
Resistive load
Lamp load (3)
Inductive load (4)
Motor (5)
Cabling
(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos M 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos M 0.4).
(2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time
constant increasing with the load.
(3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current.
(4) Inductive load: cos M 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation.
(5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/152
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177
Characteristics

Contactor breakers
Interface modules and converters
Type
around the device
Storage
Operation
Isolation
Cabling
Min.
Max.
Operating limits
Protection
C
C
kV
mm2
mm2
Module or converter type
Interface modules
Converters
- 25+ 70
- 25+ 50
rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5
1x1
2 x 2.5
0.85...10.1 Uc
Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage
- 25+ 70
- 25+ 50
Common negative terminal
1x1
2 x 2.5
0.8...1.1 Uc (2)
Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage
LA1 LC
580BD
LA1 LC
080BD
580ED
180BD
080ED
2
080FD

Schemes
LA1 LCp580pD
A1
+ E1
E2
Indication of input state
Input signals
Voltage
(logic side)
Current
State 0
guaranteed
State 1
guaranteed
Supply voltage
For U
For I
For U
LA1 Lp080BD
LA1 Lp080ED
LA1 Lp180BD
A1
+ E1
E2
A2
E1
+
A2
mA
V
mA
V
< 2.4
<2
> 20.4
a
a
a
a
a
a
c
24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24240 24 (2)
(A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2)
< 4.8
<2
> 40.8
c 524
(E1-E2)
1524 V
8.55 V
< 2.5
<2
>4
c 48
(E1-E2)
25
< 2.4
<2
> 20.4
< 4.8
<2
>4
c 524
(E1-E2)
1524 V
8.55 V
< 2.5
<2
>4
E1
A1
E3
A2
E2
By LED
c 24
c 48
(E1-E2) (E1-E2)
30
20
c 24
(E1-E2)
50
(0V)
LA1 Lp080FD
A1
(0V)
A2
E2
c 24 (1) c 48 (1)
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
20
10
c 24 (1) c 48 (1)
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
20
10
<7
<5
> 14
< 14
< 2.5
> 28
<7
<5
> 14
<14
< 2.5
> 28
c
48 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
110 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
24 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
48 (2)
(E1-E2)
c
110 (2)
(E1-E2)
250
4
30
15
250
4
30
15
300
8
35
20
300
8
35
20
300
8
35
20
in millions of operating cycles
Average
Inrush 50 Hz
consumption
60 Hz
c
VA
VA
W
Sealed 50/60 Hz VA
c
W
Operating time Pull-in
ms
at 20 C
Drop-out
ms
and at Uc
160
185
12
1530
2235
1
160
185
12
1530
2235
160
185
12
1035
830
375
450
25
2040
2545
375
450
25
2040
2545
375
450
25
1045
830
250
4
30
15
(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3.

:DUQLQJIRUVXSSO\IURPUHFWLHGDFWKHIROORZLQJFRQGLWLRQVPXVWEHPHWWKHSRZHUVXSSO\PXVWH[FHHG9$DQGWKHPD[LPXPULSSOHPXVWEHy 14 %.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/153
Characteristics

Contactor breakers
Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module
Environment
around the device
Storage
Operation
Permissible for
operation at Uc
C
C
C
Protection against
GLUHFWQJHUFRQWDFW
Conforming to VDE 0106
Tripping devices
Type
Pull-in voltage
Drop-out voltage
Average consumption
Uc
Uc
Inrush
Sealed
Minimum pulse time
VA
VA
ms
LA1 LC070p, LC072p

0.81.1
0.350.7
8
4
VA
s
s
LA1 LC052p
9
9
0.5
LA1 LC071p
0.71.1
8
4
10
Reset devices
Type
Consumption
Duration of a reset cycle
Minimum pulse duration
IEC 60337-1
7+
- 40+ 80
- 25+ 55
- 25+ 70
Suppressor module LA9 D09982

Type of protection
Connection scheme
RC (resistor-capacitor)
Operational voltage
y 250
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/154
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177
Characteristics

Contactor breakers
Breaking capacity of integral 63 contactor breakers, according to the operational

YROWDJHDQGSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHWWHG
Breaking capacity
Protection module
Reference
Irth
min
A
LBp LD03p16
10
Operational voltage
220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V
500 V
600/690 V
max
A
13
kA
kA
kA
kA
u130
u130
u130
u130
kA
10
LBp LD03p21
13
18
u130
u130
u130
u130
10
LBp LD03p22
18
25
u130
u130
50
35
10
LBp LD03p53
23
32
u130
50
50
35
10
LBp LD03p55
28
40
u130
50
50
30
10
LBp LD03p57
35
50
u130
50
50
30
10
LBp LD03p61
45
63
u130
50
50
30
10
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/155
Selection of protection
module according to the
tripping characteristics

Contactor breakers
Motor protection (normal starting)
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)

Time
300
min
10 13 18
100
min
23 28 35 45 63
25 32 40 50 irth
P16
P21
P22
P53
P55
P57
P61
2
10
min
40 s
1 min
3
10 s
1s
195
375
270
600
945
480 750
0,1 s
0,01 s
10
15 20
30 40 54 60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)

Time
300
min
10 13 18
Thermal zone
100
min
23 28 35 45 63
25 32 40 50 irth
M16
M21
M22
M53
M55
M57
M61
10
min
1 min
10 s
Magnetic zone
8
1s
78
156
480
240
108 190
600
300
150 216
380
760
0,1 s
9
0,01 s
6
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an
DPELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUHRI&ZLWKRXWSULRUFXUUHQWRZFROGVWDWH7KHDYHUDJH
RSHUDWLQJWLPHVDIWHUSURORQJHGFXUUHQWRZKRWVWDWHFDQEHFDOFXODWHGE\DSSO\LQJWKH
FRHIFLHQW
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/156
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177

Contactor breakers
Motor protection (frequent starting)

By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M
Time
300
min
100
min
Thermal zone
10
min
1 min
Magnetic zone
10 s
1s
78
156
480
240
108 190
150 216
600
300
760
380
0,1 s
0,01 s
6
10
20
40
60 80 100 110
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
Distribution circuit protection

By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L
Time
300
min
25 32 40 50
18 23 28 35 45 63 irth
100
min
L22
L53
L55
L57
10
min
L61
1 min
10 s
8
1s
75
95
0,1 s
150
190
120
240
150
300
190
380
9
0,01 s
6
10
20
40
60
100
200
400
600
1000
2000
Current in A
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/157

Contactor breakers
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit

3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz
Maximum peak current in kA
100
80
60
40
20
=
10
8
6
=
4
3
0,2
0,3
0,5
1 (1)
0,7
co
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,4 0,3
4 6 8 10 15 20
50
100 200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the
short-circuit protection zone
1000
800
600
400
200
(1)
100
80
60
40
20
10
1
8 10
15 20
50
100
200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
(1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/158
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177

Contactor breakers and
reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

3-phase 480/500 V, 50 Hz
Maximum peak current in kA
100
80
60
40
=
20
=
10
8
6
0,2
0,3
0,5
1 (1)
0,7
4
3
co
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,4 0,3
6 8 10 15 20
35 50
100
200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the
short-circuit protection zone
1000
800
600
400
(1)
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
1
8 10
15 20
35 50
100
200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
(1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/159
References

for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)
Without control test function, with padlocking facility
Standard power ratings of

3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43
220 V 400 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Black knob
15
30
33
37
55
33
Operational Breaking
Basic reference (3)
current
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
the control circuit voltage code (2)
Ue y 415 V
A
kA
63
50
Weight
kg
LD1 LD030p
3.700
With control test function and padlocking facility

LD1 LD030p

220 V 400 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
15
30
33
37
55
33
Basic reference (3)
current
for
Ue y 415 V
A
kA
63
50
kg
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

15
30
33
37
55
63
50
33
Weight
LD4 LD130p
3.800
LD4 LD030p
3.800
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)

220 V 400 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
15
30
33
37
55
33
Basic reference (3)
current
for
Ue y 415 V
A
kA
63
50
kg
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

15
30
33
37
55
63
50
33
7
LD5 LC030p
Weight
LD5 LD130p
7.600
LD5 LD030p
7.600
)RUWKHXQLWWRIXQFWLRQLWPXVWEHWWHGZLWKDSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHWREHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\VHHSDJHRSSRVLWH
Volts 24
36
42
48
110
120
220
230
240
380
415
440
480
500
400
50 Hz B
D
E
F
M
M
U
Q
N
N
600
660
60 Hz
BC
CC
CE
FC
LC
MC
MC
UX
c (4)
BD
ED
FD
9DULDQW8/W\SH(DSSURYHGYHUVLRQ63&'DW9WRRUGHUDGGVXI[H5 to the reference.

Example: LD1 LD030MH5.
(4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing
contactor breakers).
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/160
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
References

for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated and differential for normal starting motors) (1)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
LB1 LD03Mpp

of 3-phase motors
220 V 400 V
480 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3
5.5
5.5
7.5
600 V
690 V
kW
10
A
1013
LB1 LD03P16
kg
0.780
11
15
1318
LB1 LD03P21
0.780
5.5
11
11
15
18.5
1825
LB1 LD03P22
0.780
7.5
15
15
18.5
22
2332
LB1 LD03P53
0.780
22
22
25
33
2840
LB1 LD03P55
0.780
11
25
25
33
45
3550
LB1 LD03P57
0.780
15
33
33
40
55
4563
LB1 LD03P61
0.780
Thermal
Magnetic
setting range
protection
(Irth min to Irth max)
Reference
Weight
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63

of 3-phase motors
220 V 400 V
480 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3
5.5
5.5
7.5
600 V
690 V
kW
10
A
1013
A
78156
LB1 LD03M16
kg
0.780
11
15
1318
108216
LB1 LD03M21
0.780
5.5
11
11
15
18.5
1825
150300
LB1 LD03M22
0.780
7.5
22
22
25
33
2332
190380
LB1 LD03M53
0.780
22
22
25
33
2840
240480
LB1 LD03M55
0.780
11
25
25
33
45
3550
300600
LB1 LD03M57
0.780
15
33
33
40
55
4563
380760
LB1 LD03M61
0.780
Thermal
Magnetic
setting range
protection
(Irth min to Irth max)
Reference
Weight
Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)
LB6 LD03Mpp

of 3-phase motors
220 V 400 V
480 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3
5.5
5.5
7.5
600 V
690 V
kW
10
A
78156
LB6 LD03M16
kg
0.780
11
15
108216
LB6 LD03M21
0.780
5.5
11
11
15
18.5
150300
LB6 LD03M22
0.780
7.5
22
22
25
33
190380
LB6 LD03M53
0.780
22
22
25
33
240480
LB6 LD03M55
0.780
11
25
25
33
45
300600
LB6 LD03M57
0.780
15
33
33
40
55
380760
LB6 LD03M61
0.780
Magnetic protection
Reference
Weight
(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/161
Selection

Contactor breakers integral 63
for control and protection of resistive circuits
in category AC-1
Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module

Neutral point
connection
Neutral
connection
Type of
circuit
TNC
(neutral and
PE combined)
Equipment
scheme
3-pole + PEN
Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
LD1 LD030p + LB1 LD03Lpp
PEN
Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated,

Neutral point
Type of
connection
circuit
Neutral
connection
Equipment scheme
TNS
3-pole
(neutral and
PE separated)
Combination
contactor breaker + protection module
LD1 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp
Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/162
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
References

for control and protection of resistive circuits
in category AC-1
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Without control test function, with padlocking facility
Rated
thermal
current I th
T y 40 C
A
Black knob
63
Maximum
operational
current AC-1
T y 40 C
A
Maximum Breaking
Number
operational capacity (Iq) of poles
voltage
for
Ue y 415 V
V
kA
Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (2)
63
690
LD1 LC030p
50
Weight
kg
3.700
LD1 LD030p
Rated
Maximum
Maximum
thermal
operational
operational
current I th
current AC-1 voltage
T y 40 C
T y 40 C
A
A
V
Black knob (CNOMO. VDE 0113)
63
63
690
Breaking
Number
capacity (Iq) of poles
for
Ue y 415 V
kA
Basic reference.
50
LD4 LD130p
3.800
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO. VDE 0113) Emergency Stop

63
63
690
50
3
LD4 LD030p
3.800
Weight
kg
Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal
setting range
(Irth min./Irth max.)
A
1013
Magnetic
setting range
(36 Irth max)
A
3978
Number
of poles
Number of
protected
poles
Reference
LB1 LD03L16
kg
0.780
1318
54108
LB1 LD03L21
0.780
1825
75150
LB1 LD03L22
0.780
2332
95190
LB1 LD03L53
0.780
2840
120240
LB1 LD03L55
0.780
3550
150300
LB1 LD03L57
0.780
4563
190380
LB1 LD03L61
0.780
Weight
LB1 LD03Lpp
)RUWKHXQLWWRIXQFWLRQLWPXVWEHWWHGZLWKDSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHWREHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\
Volts 24
36
42
48
110
120
220
230
240
380
415
440
400
50 Hz B
D
E
F
M
M
U
Q
N
N
CC
CE
K
FC
LC
MC
MC
UX
60 Hz BC
c (3)
BD
ED
FD
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
480
500
600
660
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/163
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
5
AUTO
+
TRIP.
T
RESE
9
AUTO
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
10
1/164
References

Add-on blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20) (1)

For
use on
Type and number

of blocks per unit
Composition
Reference
Weight
kg
N/O N/C C/O

LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising:
or LD5
b 3 signalling contacts
Mounted
FRQWDFWRUVWDWH
on RH side b 1 signalling contact
FRQWURONQRELQDQ\
SRVLWLRQRWKHUWKDQ$XWR
b 1 signalling contact
tripped on short-circuit
b VLJQDOOLQJFRQWDFWWULSSHG
1 block of 5 contacts comprising:
FRQWDFWRUVWDWH
b 1 signalling contact
tripped on short-circuit
LA1 LC010
2
2
1
1
1
LD4
Mounted
on LH side
LD5
Mounted
on LH side
2
LA1 LC012
1 block of 4 contacts comprising:

2
FRQWDFWRUVWDWH
1
selectable by the user
0.280
0.220
3
LA1 LC025
0.170
1 block of 3 signalling contacts

FRQWDFWRUVWDWH
LA1 LC020
0.100
1 control circuit isolating block

(1 or 2 blocks per unit)
LA1 LC030
0.035
1 block of 3 signalling contacts

FRQWDFWRUVWDWH
LA1 LB021
0.100
1 control circuit isolating block

comprising 2 contacts
LA1 LC031
0.100
Signalling contact block (IP 10) (1)

For
use on
LD1, LD4
or LD5
Type and number

of blocks per unit
1 block comprising 1 signalling
FRQWDFWFRQWDFWRUVWDWH
Mounted on LH or RH side
Composition
Reference
N/O N/C C/O
LA1 LC001
Weight
kg
0.035
(1) UL and CSA approved.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/165
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
10
1/166
References

Accessories
Electrical tripping and reset devices

For
use on
Type and number

of devices per unit
Time delay 0.2 s
Basic reference.
LA1 LC070p
Instantaneous
LA1 LC072p
0.150
or 1 shunt trip
Instantaneous
LA1 LC071p
0.150
1 remote electrical
reset device
24 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052B
0.320
42 V 50 Hz
48 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052E
0.320
100/127 V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052F
0.320
200/240 V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052M
0.320
LD1, LD4
or LD5
WWHGZLWKDQ
LA1 LC010 or
LA1 LC012
block
1 undervoltage trip
LD1, LD4
or LD5
WWHGZLWKDQ
LA1 LC010 or
LA1 LC012
add-on block
Weight
kg
0.150
Volts
50 Hz
60 Hz
24
B
B
48
E
E
110
F
F
120
220/230
M
M
240
U
M
380/400
Q
Q
415
N
440
N
N
10
General :
pages 1/174 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/167
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
7
AUTO
+
TRIP.
RESE
8
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
RESE
10
1/168
References
Contactor breakers
Accessories and spare parts
Interface modules (1)

Mounting
On top of the
integral unit
Type
Operational
voltage
50/60 Hz
V
24240
Reference
Solid state
Control
voltage
c
V
524
LA1 LD180BD
kg
0.110
Relay output
24
24240
LA1 LD580BD
0.110
48
24240
LA1 LD580ED
0.110
Weight
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)
For c control circuit operation

Mounting
On top of the
integral unit
For use
on integral
LDp LDpppBD
LDp LDpppED
LDp LDpppFD
Operational
voltage
c (2)
V
24 (4)
48 (4)
110
Consumption
Inrush
Sealed
W
300
300
300
W
8
Description Reference (3)
Weight
Coil
LX1 LD0249
kg
0.300
Converter
LA1 LD080BD
0.150
Coil
LX1 LD0489
0.300
Converter
LA1 LD080ED
0.150
Coil
LX1 LD01109
0.300
Converter
LA1 LD080FD
0.150
Suppressor module
Mounting
Clip-on
Type
RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5)
Operational voltage
50/60 Hz
V
y 250
Reference
LA9 D09982
Weight
kg
0.010
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters.
:KHQXVHGRQUHFWLHGVLQJOHSKDVHRUSKDVHVXSSO\WKHSHDNWRSHDNULSSOHYROWDJHPXVWEHHTXDOWRRUOHVVWKDQRI
the average voltage.
Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 C.
,WLVHVVHQWLDOWKDWWKHYROWDJHFRQYHUWHUEHDVVRFLDWHGZLWKWKHVSHFLFFRLOLQGLFDWHG
(4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by Low level input. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the
supply voltage (24 or 48 V).
(5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc
max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/169
References

Accessories
Protection accessories
Description
Power terminal
protection shroud
Sealing cover
For
use on
Upstream power
terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Protection module
Sold in
lots of
5
Unit
reference
LA9 LD701
Weight
kg
0.050
LA1 LC090
0.010
Mounting
on
1 x 75 mm
7 rail or
2 x 32 mm
4 rails
Reference
LA9 LD010
Weight
kg
0.450
Colour
of knob
Red
Unit
reference
LA9 LC330
Weight
kg
0.400
Black
LA9 LC331
0.400
Red
LA9 LC530
0.400
Black
LA9 LC531
0.400
Mounting accessories
Description
LA1 LC090
Mounting plate
For
use on
LD1, LD4, LD5
Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)

Type
Adjustable
from 0 to 185 mm
with extension
(control knob mounted
on plate or door)
For
use on
LD1
LD4, LD5
LA9 LD010
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/170
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
References

Coils (replacement parts)
a.c. operation
LX1 LDppp
Rated control
circuit voltages
Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz
V
V
24
Average
Inductance Voltage
resistance at of closed
code (1)
20 C 10 % circuit
:
0.213
H
0.045
BC
LX1 LD020
kg
0.300
24
0.323
0.071
LX1 LD024
0.300
36
0.503
0.106
CC
LX1 LD030
0.300
48
0.845
0.19
CE
LX1 LD040
0.300
42
0.987
0.22
LX1 LD042
0.300
48
1.26
0.29
LX1 LD048
0.300
110
4.88
LX1 LD090
0.300
115/120
5.89
1.18
FC
LX1 LD100
0.300
110
6.48
1.48
LX1 LD110
0.300
127
9.80
2.13
LX1 LD127
0.300
220
19.82
4.2
LC
LX1 LD180
0.300
230/240
23.24
4.5
MC
LX1 LD190
0.300
220/230
30.51
6.7
LX1 LD220
0.300
240
37.66
7.9
LX1 LD240
0.300
440
80.46
16.7
UX
LX1 LD360
0.300
380/400
460/480
93.63
20
LX1 LD380
0.300
415/440
116.46
23.7
LX1 LD415
0.300
500
575/600
152.18
31
LX1 LD500
0.300
660
290.80
60
LX1 LD660
0.300
Reference
Weight
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cosMWR9$VHDOHGFRVM: 0.28) 20 to 30 VA.

Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos MWR9$VHDOHGFRVM: 0.30) 24 to 36 VA.
d.c. operation
7KHLQWHJUDOFDQRSHUDWHRQDGFVXSSO\ZKHQWWHGZLWKDVSHFLDOFRLODQGFRUUHVSRQGLQJ
voltage converter: see page 1/169
(1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.
10
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
Selection :
pages 1/146 to 1/149
Characteristics :
pages 1/150 to 1/155

pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/171
Operation

A1
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
Auxiliary contact actuators

Auto
A2
5/L3
1/L1
LD4
A2
A1
LD1
3/L2
Auxiliary contact states

according to the positions of the control knob
+0
U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1
LC020
LA1
LC030
41
13
23
31
(53)
63
42
14
24
32
(54)
64
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
42
14 24 32
54
13 23 31
16 18
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96 98
41
13 23 31
53
14 24 32
15
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
42
14 24 32
54
98
96 98
96
95
13 23 31
13
23
31
14
24
32
98
98
95
08
08
05
13 23 31
13
23
31
14
24
32
96 98
96
98
95
06 08
06
08
05
16 18
16
18
15
LA1
LC001
14
24
32
95
ou
Contact closed
LD1
LA1 LC025
13 23 31
13
23
31
Contact open
LA1 LC012
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
LA1 LC010
LD4
Off + control test function
Off
4
On, contactor open
AUTO
AUTO
5
On, contactor closed
AUTO
AUTO
6
Off after overload
TRIP.
TRIP.
Tripped on overload
TRIP.
TRIP.
TRIP.
TRIP.
Off after short-circuit

TRIP.
TRIP.
Manual reset
TRIP.
10
RESET
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/172
TRIP.
95
RESET
Characteristics :
pages 1/146 to 1/155
References :
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions :
pages 1/174 and 1/175
Operation

Reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Auxiliary contact actuators
5/L3
1/L1
LD5
3/L2
Auxiliary contact states

according to the positions of the control knob
+0
ou
A1
A2
A2
A1
Auto
Auxiliary contacts
41
13
23
31
53
63
14
24
32
54
64
LA1
LC031
42
LA1
LC021
13
23
31
98
LA1
LC001
14
24
32
96
13
23
31
98
08
13
23
31
96
98
06
08
16
18
13
23
31
LA1
LC020
LA1 LC025
95
95
95
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
14
24
32
05
16 18
14
24
32
95
ou
05
Contact closed
LA1 LC012
15
Contact open
14
24
32
6/T3
4/T2
2/T1
LA1 LC010
Off + control test function

13 23 31
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
Off
On, reversing contactor open

AUTO
On, closed
AUTO
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
14 24 32
15
13 23 31
16 18
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06
08
05
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
06 08
96 98
13 23 31
08
98
13 23 31
96
98
13 23 31
41
13 23 31
53 63
05
95
14 24 32
05
95
14 24 32
95
14 24 32
42
14 24 32
54 64
On, closed
AUTO
Tripped on overload
TRIP. +
Off after overload

TRIP. +
TRIP. +
Off after short-circuit

TRIP. +
Manual reset
TRIP. +
RESET
General :
pages 1/140 to 1/145
14 24 32
15
Characteristics :
pages 1/146 to 1/155
References :
pages1/160 to 1/171
95
Dimensions :
pages 1/174 and 1/175
1/173
10
Dimensions,
mounting


Control circuit: a.c.
Control circuit: d.c.
LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03
LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 + LA1 LD080
100,5
90
192
45
210
250
146
158,5
192
Reversing contactor breakers integral 63
= 28 =
16,5
121,5
100,5
= 28 =
16,5
146
158,5
104,5
128,5
45
210
243
121,5
97,5
121,5
LA1 LD080
=
90
Current limiter
LD5 LDp30 + LBp LD03M
LA9 LB920
45
59
194
63
181
146
51
53,5
16,5
45
148
160,5
100,5
121,5
210
275
153,5
129,5
103
115
0
59
Add-on blocks
For mounting on contactor breakers integral 63
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC052
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC07p
LA1 LC020
LA1 LC030
(1 ou 2)
LA1 LC025
LA LC001
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
LA1 LC012
13
11
LA1 LC025
51
26
12
12
11
For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 63

LA1 LC021, LC025
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC031
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC052p
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC07pp
LA1 LC020
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC031
LA1 LC021
LA1 LC021
LA1 LC025
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC012
9
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
10
13
12
26
13
11
11
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/174
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Schemes:
pages 1/176 and 1/177
26
51
12
Mounting (continued)

Mounting
On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres
On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
[0
G
75
33
DZ5 ME9
210
210
220
128,5
LA9 LD010
210
266
137,5
On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9 LD010
15
AF1 EA5
LD1
266
137,5
192
28
LD1
192
28
LD1
192
28
LD4
266
137,5
192
28
LD4
192
28
LD4
192
28
LD5
282
153,5
194
63
LD5
194
63
LD5
194
63
With mounting plate LA9 LD010

SOn 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
LA9 LD010
68
120
110
DZ5 ME5
31
192
78
LD4
192
78
LD5
194
94
5
Minimum electrical
clearance
30
Flush mounting (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers)
4 (1)
1
(2)
==
46
(3)
a1
a2
a1
a2
LD1 LD030
90
LD4 LDp30
90
LD5 LDp30
181
LA1 LC010
13
LA1 LC012
13
LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p
51
LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p
51
7
30
40
c
LD1
(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5.

(2) Centre of operating handle.
(3) Fixing centre.
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
= 28 =
=
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
= =
54
45
59
90
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
= =
54
105
105
243
207357 (LD4)
209359 (LD5)
105
105
65
54
275
Door drillings
105
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30
63
10
59
181
Schemes:
pages 1/176 and 1/177
1/175
Schemes

A1
A2
A2
6/T3
1/L1
5/L3
4/T2
Q1
A1
1/L1
3/L2
2/T1
A1
5/L3
Q1
A2
A1
A2
5/L3
LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M ou LD03P
LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p
3/L2
LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p

3/L2
Reversing contactor breakers

integral 63
with protection module LBp
1/L1
Contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp
For contactor breakers LD4
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
6/T3
For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5
Mounted on RH side
Breaker
8
53
63
54
64
LA1 LC031
Control knob
position
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
1/176
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
31
41
32
42
96
95
23
31
32
24
23
24
Dimensions, mounting:
pages 1/174 and 1/175
13
13
14
10
14
31
32
98
23
24
95
08
05
Isolator
LA1 LC001
95
13
14
98
31
15
31
Auto
32
23
24
13
LA1 LC021
14
42
41
LA1 LC001
18
Mounted on LH side
LA1 LC025
LA1 LC020
32
08
06
+0
05
Short-circuit
signalling
16
95
Trip signallingt
98
13
14
(64) (63)
54
53
53
54
1 or 2 LA1 LC030
LA1 LC012
LA1 LC010
23
Isolator
24
Mounted on LH side
For reversing contactor breakers LD5
4/T2
Add-on blocks
LA1 LC030
2/T1
6/T3
6/T3
4/T2
LB6 LD03M
96
LB6 LD03M
2/T1
4/T2
2/T1
Schemes (continued)

Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5
Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC052p
D1
C1
LA1 LC070, LC072
TRIP +
RESET
D2
C2
U<
B4
B1
The use of instantaneous auxiliary

contact block LA1 LC020 prevents
the use of tripping devices or electrical
reset devices
B2
B3
)RUFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQGUHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDOUHDG\WWHGZLWKDQ/$/&RU/$/&LQVWDQWDQHRXVDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWEORFN
3
Interface modules
LA1 LD180
LA1 LD580
A1
A1
+ E1
+ E1
E2
E2
A2
A2
Voltage converter LA1 LD080 (supply with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation)
Switching by control contact
24 or 48 V
E1
A1
E3
(0V)
E2
A2
E1
+
(0V)
E2
A1
A2
Supply
24 or 48 V
Switching by Low level input
E1
Low
level
input
(0V)
A1
E3
E2
A2
10
General:
pages 1/140 to 1/145
References:
pages 1/160 to 1/171
Dimensions, mounting:
pages 1/174 and 1/175
1/177
Presentation,
characteristics

1
Adaptors for use with busbar systems
Presentation
Reducing the installation time of components is an important factor that also
increases productivity.
The comprehensive range of adaptors and mounting accessories allows this
objective to be achieved.
There are numerous advantages:
b saving of space in enclosures,
b reduced size of enclosures,
b reduced wiring time,
b increased protection of personnel against accidental direct contact (IP 20) through
the use of insulated mounting rails,
b H[LELOLW\DQGPRGXODULW\RIHTXLSPHQW
b reliable operation of the equipment with easier maintenance.
Description
Power distribution is achieved by a 3-pole or 5-pole busbar system.
The adaptors clip directly onto the busbar system, providing instantaneous electrical
connection. Busbar system pitch: 40 or 60 mm.
These adaptors allow mounting of motor starter components such as:
b GV2 ME, GV2 P or GV3 ME motor circuit-breakers,
b TeSys D and TeSys K contactors up to 38 A,
b integral 63 contactor breakers,
They are available in different sizes to allow easy installation of varying component
combinations.
These adaptors can be used in conjunction with interface modules communicating
with an AS-Interface cabling system. This enables motor starters to be set up on an
AS-Interface cabling system, bringing all the advantages of the 2 technologies.
LA9 Z32199
4
General characteristics
Temperature resistance
Rated frequency of current
Rated operational current Depending on type of busbar
and at 35 C
&RHIFLHQW.WREHDSSOLHG
according to ambient temperature
Rated insulation voltage
Rated permissible
With insulated busbar support
peak current
Busbar dimensions
Rated current
Maximum let-through energy
6XSSRUW[LQJE\VFUHZV
Cabling, by connectors
Multi-strand cable
Solid cable
Tightening torque
mm
kA
A 2s
mm
mm2
mm2
mm2
N.m
30 x 5
450
30 x 10
630
30 x 5
30 x 10
45
55
6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108
LA9 Z11105
Min.
Max.
120
120
35
120
3 x 12
Characteristics of adaptors for use with busbar systems (3-phase)

Adaptor type
C
Hz
mm
A
C
K
V
V
IEC 60439
IP 20 with insulated mounting rail LA9 Z098pp
120
50/60
12 x 5
12 x 10
15 x 5
20 x 5
20 x 10 25 x 5
200
360
250
320
520
400
35
40
45
50
55
60
1
0.9
0.75
0.65
0.55
0.35
690 conforming to IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040
690
LA9 Z11098 and Z11099
LA9 Z11100 and Z11101
12 x 5
12 x 10
12 x 5
12 x 10 20 x 10
35
35
30
35
35
1 x 108
4 x 108
1 x 108
11 x 108 11 x 108
4x6
4x5
LA9 Z11103
LA9 Z11104
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
4
35
16
70
4
35
16
70
4
35
1x6
1 x 10
LA9 Z
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529

Conductor c.s.a.
(colour: black)
Type of conductor insulation
Permissible current
Rated peak current
A
V
kA
A2 s
10
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
1/178
mm2
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
32196
32228
32229
32199
32200
32208 to
210 32232
32343, 32344 32345

40132, 60132
40232, 60232
IP 20
4
6
6
10
AWG 12
AWG 10
AWG 10
AWG 8
PVC 105 C
25
32
32
63
690 conforming to NF C 20-040 and IEC 60947-1
6
6
6
10
2 x 105
2 x 105
2 x 105
3 x 105
32253
32248
32249
16
2.5
AWG 22/14
15
250
80
10
3 x 105
Characteristics

Short-circuit resistance
Determining the spacing between busbar supports (1)

Busbar system with 60 mm pitch
Peak current Ipk (kA)
Peak current Ipk (kA)
Busbar system with 40 mm pitch
50
40
70
60
30 x 10
12 x 5 and 12 x 10
30
50
30 x 5
20
40
10
30
12 x 10
and 20 x 10
12 x 5
20
200
300
400
500
%XVEDUVXSSRUW[LQJFHQWUHVPP
600
200
300
400
500
%XVEDUVXSSRUW[LQJFHQWUHVPP
600
(1) Depending on the prospective short-circuit current
Current capacity of busbars

For an ambient temperature of 35C and a busbar temperature of 65C
mm2
A
C.s.a.
Permissible current
12 x 5
200
15 x 5
250
20 x 5
320
25 x 5
400
30 x 5
450
12 x 10
360
20 x 10
520
30 x 10
630
Factor K2
2,2
C
0
5
10
15
2,1
2,0
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
1,9
1,8
1,7
1,6
Ambient temperature
,IWKHDERYHFOLPDWLFFRQGLWLRQVDUHPRGLHGFRQVXOWWKHFKDUWEHORZWRQGWKHFRUUHFWLRQIDFWRU.2 to be applied.
55
60
65
1,5
1,4
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100 105 110 115 120 125

Busbar temperature (C)
Example: in normal operating conditions, a set of 30 x 10 tinned busbars can withstand a continuous load of 630 A.
800 A
)RUDORDGRI$WKHFRUUHFWLRQFRHIFLHQW.2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 630 A ). It follows that the temperature rise of the busbars will be
82.5 C.
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/179
10
hhh
40 mm : LA9 Z32228
60 mm : LA9 Z32229
GV2 ME, GV2 P
2
40 mm : LA9 Z32196
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06K12
4
40 mm : LA9 Z32199
60 mm : LA9 Z32200
6
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z40132
60 mm : LA9 Z60132
7
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1 D09D38
9
LC1 D09D38
10
1/180
References
Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - non-reversing

Motor starter type
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1,

LP4 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC1 D09D38
or GV2 P
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
32
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm
45 x 139
LA9 Z32196
kg
0.788
45 x 182
LA9 Z32228
0.984
45 x 182
LA9 Z40132
0.984
54 x 182
LA9 Z32199
1.144

Motor starter type
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1,

LP4 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC1 D09D38
or GV2 P
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm
45 x 182
LA9 Z32229
kg
0.984
32
45 x 182
LA9 Z60132
0.984
54 x 182
LA9 Z32200
1.220
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/181
60 mm : LA9 Z32210
GV2 ME, GV2 P
2
40 mm : LA9 Z32232
GV2 ME, GV2 P
4
40 mm : LA9 Z32208
60 mm : LA9 Z32209
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z40232
60 mm : LA9 Z60232
7
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC2 D09D38
9
LC2 D09D38
10
1/182
Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - reversing

Motor starter type
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2,

LP5 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09D38
or GV2 P
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
mm
90 x 139
LA9 Z32232
kg
0.788
32
90 x 182
LA9 Z40232
1.884
135 x 182
LA9 Z32208
0.638
Adaptors for busbar systems with 60 mm pitch - reversing

Motor starter type
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2,

LP5 K06K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09D38
or GV2 P
Operational
current AC-3
440 V
A
12
Width x height
of adaptor
Sold in
lots of
Unit reference
Weight
mm
90 x 182
LA9 Z32210
kg
1.868
32
90 x 182
LA9 Z60232
1.948
135 x 182
LA9 Z32209
0.651
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/183
1
60 mm : LA9 Z32253
3
GV3 ME
5
60 mm : LA9 Z32345
7
LD1 LD, LD4 LD
10
1/184

Motor starter type
Width x height
of adaptor
mm
108 x 244
Reference
integral LD1, LD4 LD
Operational current AC-3

440 V
A
63
Weight
LA9 Z32345
kg
0.887
GV3 ME
80
72 x 182
LA9 Z32253
0.347
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/185
LA9 Z11099 LA9 Z11098
LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z32936
LA9 Z32
LA9 Z098
40 mm
LA9 Z11098
LA9 Z11099
LA9 Z11100
LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249
5
LA9 Z91413
LA9 Z11105
LA9 Z32
LA9 Z098
LA9 Z11102
60 mm
9
LA9 Z11100
LA9 Z11118
10
LA9 Z11104
LA9 Z11101
LA9 Z11105
1/186
LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249
Accessories for busbar sets with 40 mm pitch

Description
3-pole
Sold in
lots of
10
Unit
reference
LA9 Z11098
Weight
kg
1.040
3-pole + N + T
10
LA9 Z11099
1.400
For busbars, thickness 5 mm
10
LA9 Z09818
0.420
10
LA9 Z09820
0.940
Connector
Capacity 35 mm2
50
LA9 Z11103
2.300
Protective cover
For connector LA9 Z11103
LA9 Z91413
0.160
Side module, 13.5 x 182 mm
For increasing the width of the adaptor
LA9 Z32936
0.472
Plug-in terminal blocks

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)
Width 54 mm
LA9 Z32248
0.066
Width 45 mm
LA9 Z32249
0.055
3-pole
Sold in
lots of
10
Unit
reference
LA9 Z11100
Weight
kg
2.100
3-pole + N
10
LA9 Z11101
2.660
3-pole
10
LA9 Z11102
0.310
4-pole
10
LA9 Z11118
0.380
10
LA9 Z09819
0.800
10
LA9 Z09820
0.940
Capacity 70 mm2
25
LA9 Z11104
1.875
3-pole capacity 120 mm
LA9 Z11105 (2)
0.719
Protective cover
For connector LA9 Z11104
LA9 Z91413
0.160
Plug-in terminal blocks

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)
Width 54 mm
LA9 Z32248
0.066
Width 45 mm
LA9 Z32249
0.055
Busbar system supports (1)
Insulated rails
(length 1 m)
Accessories for busbar sets with 60 mm pitch

Description
Busbar system supports (1)
Insulated terminal shroud
Insulated rails
(length 1 m)
Connectors
(1) For dimensions and rated operational current, see pages 1/178 and 1/179
(2) Supplied complete with protective cover
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
Dimensions :
pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/187
Dimensions

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
Dimensions
Motor starter combinations, non-reversing

Motor starter type
40/60 40/60
40/60 40/60
e1
e1
e1
40/60 40/60
GV2 ME or P + LCp D
x
GV2 ME or P + LCp, LPp K
40 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
125
125
Adaptor
reference
LA9 Z32196
60 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
e1
Other
Adaptor
reference
40
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12
45
152
GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12
45
152
145
145
LA9 Z32196
40
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12
45
184
125
125
LA9 Z32228
135
135
LA9 Z32229
40
GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12
45
184
145
145
LA9 Z32228
155
155
LA9 Z32229
40
GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18
45
200
139
139
LA9 Z40132
149
149
LA9 Z60132
40
GV2 P + LC1 D09 to D18
45
200
142
142
LA9 Z40132
152
152
LA9 Z60132
40
45
200
146
146
LA9 Z40132
156
156
LA9 Z60132
40
45
200
146
146
LA9 Z40132
156
156
LA9 Z60132
40
54
200
131
137
LA9 Z32199
141
147
LA9 Z32200
33
54
200
142
142
LA9 Z32199
152
152
LA9 Z32200
33
54
200
140
146
LA9 Z32199
150
156
LA9 Z32200
33
54
200
142
146
LA9 Z32199
152
156
LA9 Z32200
33
integral 63 LD1, LD4
108
244
250
LA9 Z32345
50
GV3 ME
72
182
180
LA9 Z32253
50
(1) LC = Low Consumption
X electrical clearance
GV2 ME
GV2 P
integral 63
GV3 ME
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
1/188
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
Ue y 415 V
40
40
20
40
Ue = 440 V
40
80
20
40
Ue = 500 and 600 V

40
120
20
50
Dimensions (continued)

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
60
40/60 40/60
60
1
e1
integral
e1
GV2 ME or P + LC2, LP2 K
Dimensions
a
a
Motor starter combinations, reversing

Motor starter type
40 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
125
125
Adaptor
reference
LA9 Z32232
60 mm system
c
a
c or
LC(1)
e1
LD5
Adaptor
reference
40
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12
90
150
GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12
90
150
145
145
LA9 Z32232
40
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12
90
184
135
135
LA9 Z32210
40
GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12
90
184
155
155
LA9 Z32210
40
90
200
139
139
LA9 Z40232
149
149
LA9 Z60232
40
90
200
142
142
LA9 Z40232
152
152
LA9 Z60232
40
GV2 ME +LC2 D25 to D38
90
200
146
146
LA9 Z40232
156
156
LA9 Z60232
40
90
200
146
146
LA9 Z40232
156
156
LA9 Z60232
40
135
203
131
137
LA9 Z32208
141
147
LA9 Z32209
33
135
203
142
142
LA9 Z32208
152
152
LA9 Z32209
33
135
201
140
146
LA9 Z32208
150
156
LA9 Z32209
33
135
201
142
146
LA9 Z32208
152
156
LA9 Z32209
33
GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12
90
150
125
LA9 Z32232
40
GV2 P + LP5 K06 to K12
90
150
145
LA9 Z32232
40
GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12
90
184
135
LA9 Z32210
40
GV2 P + LP5 K06 and K12
90
184
155
LA9 Z32210
40
(1) LC = Low Consumption
10
Characteristics :
pages 1/178 and 1/179
References :
pages 1/180 to 1/187
1/189
Selection guide
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Functions
Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without
using tools
Product type
Power circuit pre-wiring

components
For contactors
TeSys D (9 to 25 A)
Type of starter
Direct and reversing
Direct
Coil control
Yes
Use with motor starters
Limited to 60 A (Ith)
Limited to 8 starters (1)
Number of motor starters
Type of connection or bus
Number of channels
References
LAD 3p
LAD 9AP3pp
Pages
1/197
1/199
Control-command pre-wiring components for

TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
Reversing
No
Yes
(1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2 ME and upstream terminal block LAD 3B1.
10
1/190
No
Communication with the processing part
Control-command pre-wiring components for

TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
Splitter box
Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB

network interface module
4
TeSys D (40 to 65 A)
Direct
Reversing
Yes
Yes
8 starters per splitter box
4 starters per module
HE 10
Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet, TCP/IP,

3UREXV'3,17(5%86'HYLFH1HW
16 inputs/12 outputs
LU9 G02
STB EPI2145
1/199
1/199
10
1/191
Presentation
Installation system
7H6\V4XLFNWLVDPRGXODUV\VWHPZKLFKVWDQGDUGLVHVDQGVLPSOLHVVHWWLQJXSRI
motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits.
,QVWDOODWLRQRIDPRWRUVWDUWHULVWKHUHIRUHTXLFNVLPSOHVDIHDQGH[LEOH,QDGGLWLRQ
this system:
b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date,
b reduces maintenance time and
b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate
interfaces and the amount of ducting.
System for motor starters with spring terminals
Motor starters with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers

b From 0 to 18 A max.,
b TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers combined with TeSys D contactors from 9 to 25 A
(spring terminal version),
b 4XLFNWSUHZLUHGSRZHUDQGFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQV
Motor starters with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers

b From 9 to 65 A max.,
b TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers combined with TeSys D contactors from 40 to 65 A
(spring terminal version),
b 4XLFNWSUHZLUHGFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQVRQO\
b For pre-wired power connections, use busbar sets from the TeSys D, 40 to 65 A
contactor range (see page 5/85).
4
Motor starter with GV2 ME circuit-breakers
This range comprises pre-wiring components for:

b the power circuits,
b the control circuits.
Power circuit pre-wiring components
(motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting
the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules,
b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters,
b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and
the earth cables (6 mm2).
Note: with GV3 circuit-breakers, no accessories are required for pre-wiring of the
power circuit. The GV3 Ppp outgoing terminal block can be removed.
This circuit-breaker is also sold with only one terminal block (reference: GV3 Ppp1).
Control circuit pre-wiring components
(motor starters with TeSys GV2 and GV3 circuit-breakers)
7
Motor starter with GV3 P circuit-breakers
b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and
the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data
for this motor starter.
b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter:
v HE 10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the PLC via
the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system.
v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable
IRUXVHLQDQ$GYDQW\V67%FRQJXUDWLRQIRUFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH3/&YLDDHOGEXV
10
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
1/192
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
Installation system
Control/command
HE 10 connection
1
1
1 Automation platform
2 Connection cable
TSXCDPpp or ABFH20pp
3 Splitter box LU9 G02
2
2
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1)
&RQJXUDWLRQH[DPSOH(for motor starter applications only):
Power supply module
Module
STB PDT 3100
Connection base
STB XBA 2200
Terminal block
STB XTB 1130
Parallel interface module (2)
Module
STB EPI 2145
Connection base
STB XBA 3000
Network interface module (3)
CANopen
STB NCO 1010 (4)
Fipio
STB NFP 2210
Ethernet TCP/IP
STB NIP 2210
InterBus
STB NIB 1010 (4)
3UREXV'3
STB NDP 1010 (4)
DeviceNet
STB NDN 1010 (4)
Modbus Plus
STB NMP 2210
Terminal block
STB WTS 2120
4 Network interface module

5 Supply module
6 Parallel interface module
7H6\V4XLFNW/$'$3pp used with modules APP1 Cpp
7
7 7H6\V4XLFNWPRGXOH
8 Adapter plate APP 2CX
9 Splitter box LU9 G02 for 8 direct motor
starters, with channel connections on the
APP 1C module side by two HE 10
connectors (20-way) and on theTeSys
4XLFNWVLGHE\5-FRQQHFWRUV
10 Connection cable APP 2AH40H060
10
The motor starter is connected to an APP 1Cp module 7 using an adapter plate
APP 2CX 8 and a connection cable APP 2AH40H060 10.
Information is available on the module for each motor starter:
b 1 output: motor control,
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
(2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters.
(3) Reference to be selected according to the network used.
(4) Optimised version.
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
10
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/193
Description
Installation system
Power components
2
4
2a
3
2b
3
4
7
(only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)

Power kits LAD 3p
Each motor starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1DQGWZR4XLFNW
technology power connection modules 2.
The plate is used for mounting TeSys D contactors 3 (9 to 25 A, direct or reversing,
ZLWKVSULQJWHUPLQDOVDQGWWHGZLWKDFRUGFFRLODQGWKH*90(FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
4 only. This plate is mounted on two 35 mm 7 rails or is screwed onto a base plate.
The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical, whatever the rating of
the contactor up to 18 A.
The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box
and the circuit-breaker.
The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the circuitbreaker and the contactor.
Splitter boxes LAD 32p
Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters.
They can be combined to create motor starters up to 60 A per power supply.
A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of 2 direct starters.
Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm2).
Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1
The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions:
b power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
b power supply between two connected splitter boxes.
7KHXSVWUHDPWHUPLQDOEORFNFRQQHFWVWRWKHVSOLWWHUER[XVLQJ4XLFNWWHFKQRORJ\,W
is positioned on the splitter box or straddling two splitter boxes and takes up a width
equivalent to two motor starters.
Outgoing terminal block LAD 331
The outgoing terminal block 7 performs two functions:
b connection of the motor power supply cables up to 6 mm2,
b connection of the motor earth cables.
In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for
maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal.
The outgoing terminal block connects to the downstream spring terminals on the
FRQWDFWRUXVLQJ4XLFNWWHFKQRORJ\
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/194
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References:
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
Description (continued)
Installation system
Control/command components
Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp
The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on
the contactor and on the TeSys GV2 ME or TeSys GV3 P motor circuit-breaker, in the
location provided for the front-mounting block.
It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 18 A for TeSys GV2 ME and 65 A for
TeSys GV3 P.
Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect
connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks, etc.).
These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or
without contactor coil interface relay.
The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V.
The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface,
at 24 V d.c.
The version with relay has a connector for connecting the contactor power supply.
Module LAD9 AP3pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors:
3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system.
4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with
relay).
5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil
(supplied complete with shunt)
3 4 5

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect motor starters which
LQFRUSRUDWH7H6\V4XLFNWWHFKQRORJ\WRWKHSURFHVVLQJXQLW3/&TXLFNO\DQG
without any need for tools. The parallel wiring module provides the status and
command information for each motor starter.
Control connection modules LAD9 AP3pp are connected to the parallel wiring
modules using RJ45 cables LU9Rpp 6, which are available in different lengths.
The following information is available for each motor starter:
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status,
b 1 output: contactor coil control.
A direct motor starter uses one RJ45 channel.
A reversing motor starter uses two RJ45 channels.
Note: for motor starters built using TeSys GV3 circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors, the
4XLFNWSUHZLUHGV\VWHPDOORZVWKHFRQWDFWRUWREHPRXQWHGEHORZWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHURU
mounting of the two devices side by side.
Parallel wiring module LU9 G02
This module 7 enables connection of up to 8 direct or 4 reversing motor starters

directly to the I/O modules of PLCs. It is used with the Advantys Telefast pre-wiring
system (1).
This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.
Dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 (2)
This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the
Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor
starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus,
),3,2&$1RSHQ(WKHUQHW7&3,33UREXV'3,17(5%86DQG'HYLFH1HW
(1) Please consult our catalogue Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces.
(2) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References:
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/195
1
LAD 3B1
2
LAD 352
GV2 MEpp3
LC1 Dpp3

components
Direct starter
LAD 331
8
LC2 Dpp3

components
Reversing starter
10
1/196
References
Installation system
Power circuit pre-wiring components (only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Description
Maximum
connection c.s.a.
Application
Sold in
lots of
Reference
16 mm2 (1)
Power supply of 1 or 2
power splitter boxes
LAD 3B1
Extension by
Number of starters
Reference
LAD 32p
LAD 322
0.120
LAD 324
0.240
Composition
Reference
1 plate LAD 311 for GV2 ME and

2 power connection modules LAD 341
LAD 352
Maximum
connection c.s.a.
Application
Sold in
lots of
Reference
6 mm2
Connection of
motor cables
10
LAD 331
No. of
starters
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Plate for mounting a

GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor
10
LAD 311
0.042
Power connection module
10
LAD 341
0.018
Upstream terminal block

LAD 3B1
Description
Power splitter box, 60 A
Description
LAD 324
Weight
kg
0.212
Weight
kg
Weight
kg
Direct starter
Power connection kit
0.078
Reversing starter
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD 352
Description
Outgoing terminal block
Description
LAD 352
Weight
kg
0.050
Weight
kg
(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References:
1 set of 3 x 6 mm 2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063),
1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103),
1 set of 3 x 16 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163).
LAD 331
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description:
pages 1/194 and 1/195
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/197
LAD 32p
STB EPI 2145
1
GV2 MEpp3
2
LC2 Dpp3
LC1 Dpp3
LU9 G02
LAD 9AP3D1
LAD 9AP3D2
6
GV3 Ppp
LC2 DppA3
LC1 DppA3
9
Note: Circuit-breakers TeSys GV3 P and contactors LC1 D40A3 to D65A3 can be mounted side by side, using a set of S-shape busbars (GV3 S).
10
1/198
Installation system
Control-command pre-wiring components

Description
Control connection modules
TeSys D
coil voltage
Type of coil
control relay
Type of
starter
Reference
Weight
kg
a 12... 250 V or
c 5...130 V
Electromechanical
Direct
LAD 9AP31
0.150
Reversing
LAD 9AP32
0.200
c 24 V
Without relay
Direct
LAD 9AP3D1
0.140
Reversing
LAD 9AP3D2
0.190
Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V)

Description
LAD 9AP3p
Splitter box
Description
Advantys STB parallel
interface module
Connectors
Reference
PLC side
Motor starter side
2 x HE 10
20-way
8 x RJ45
Weight
kg
LU9 G02
Connectors
Reference
PLC side
Motor starter side
4 x RJ45
0.260
Weight
kg
STB EPI 2145
0.165
Connection cables
Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9 G02 or STB EPI 2145
Connectors
Length
Reference
Weight
m
2 x RJ45 connectors
kg
0.3
LU9 R03
0.045
LU9 R10
0.065
LU9 R30
0.125
Length
Reference
Between splitter box LU9 G02 and the PLC

Type of connection
Gauge
C.s.a.
AWG
mm2
22
0.324
0.5
TSX CDP 053
0.085
TSX CDP 103
0.150
TSX CDP 203
0.280
TSX CDP 303
0.410
TSX CDP 503
0.670
ABF H20 H100
0.080
ABF H20 H200
0.140
ABF H20 H300
0.210
TSX CDP 301
0.400
TSX CDP 501
0.660
Characteristics
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Spring terminal connections for:

b the external contact
b the auxiliary power supply
2-way, 5 mm pitch
Wire c.s.a.: 0.22.5 mm
10
APE 1PRE21
0.020
Self-stripping connector for:

b the external contact
b the auxiliary power supply
2-way, 5 mm pitch
Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm
16
APE 1PAD21
0.020
Connecting cable
between module APP 1Cp and
splitter box LU9 G02 ( length: 0.6 m)
Connectors:
1 x HE 10, 30-way
2 x HE 10, 20-way
APP 2AH40H060
0.400
PLC side
HE 10
20-way
HE 10
20-way
28
Bare wires
Weight
Splitter box side
HE 10
20-way
22
0.080
0.324
kg
Separate components
Description
Weight
kg
10
Presentation:
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description:
pages 1/194 and 1/195
Characteristics:
pages 1/200 and 1/201
Dimensions:
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes:
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/199
Characteristics
Installation system
Type of control connection module
LAD 9AP3pp
General environment
Standard
&HUWLFDWLRQV
Resistance to
incandescent wire
Shock resistance
Resistance to
5HVLVWDQFHWRUDGLDWHGHOGV
Immunity to fast
transient currents
Surge withstand
Immunity to
UDGLRHOHFWULFHOGV


Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 gn
and BV/LR
11 ms and 15 gn (half sine wave)

2100 Hz : 4 and 3100 Hz: 0,7

V/m
10 (261000 MHz)
Level 3
kV
2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode

Wave form: 1.2/50 s - 8/20 s
10 (0.15...80 MHz)
Operation in
RRUVWDQGLQJHQFORVXUH
Operation in
wall-mounted enclosure
- 5+ 60
- 5+ 40
C
mm
- 40+ 70
> 30
Storage
Space required around
For inserting cables
mounted assembly
and heat dissipation
Degree of pollution
$VVHPEO\[LQJ
(with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
Suitable wire
c.s.a.
IEC 60439-1
UL, CSA
IP 40 (mounted assembly)
960
Voltage supply Number of wires

for power
Flexible cable
without cable end
Solid cable
Voltage supply Number of wires
for contactor
Flexible cable
coil control
with cable end (max)
Flexible cable
without cable end (max)
Solid cable (max)
Level 3
3
2Q[PPUDLOVRUZLWK[PPVFUHZVRQSODWHIRU*90(
mm
mm
mm
3
16
25
mm
25
2
1.5
mm
2.5
mm
2.5
Conforming to IEC 60439-1
60 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes)
A
V
V
kV
Hz
kA
60
80 % of Imax at 60 C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page)
18 (with an empty slot between two starters)
750
690
6
50-60
50
kA
9.1 (for 70 ms)
V
V
V
a 12250 (with interface relay)

c 524 (without interface relay)
c 5130 (with interface relay)
3-phase power circuit characteristics

Maximum
current
Per power
supply
Per sub-base
GV2 operating limit
Maximum current per starter
Insulation voltage
Operational voltage
U imp
Rated operational frequency
Rated short-circuit current
conditional Isc at 415 V
Permissible
short-time rating Icw

Contactor coil control voltage
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/200
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
Installation system
7DEOHRI*9FLUFXLWEUHDNHUFXUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQDW&DPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHZLWK7H6\V4XLFNW
Circuit-breaker reference
GV2 ME06
GV2 ME07
GV2 ME08
GV2 ME10
GV2 ME14
GV2 ME16
GV2 ME20
GV2 ME21
GV2 ratings (1)

1 - 1.6 A
1.6 - 2.5 A
2.5 - 4 A
4 - 6.3 A
6 - 10 A
9 - 14 A
13 - 18 A
17 - 23 A
0D[LPXPFXUUHQWRI*9ZLWK7H6\V4XLFNW
1.28 A
2A
3.2 A
5A
8A
11.2 A
14.4 A
18 A
Electromechanical relay characteristics

Type of control connection module
LAD 9AP31, LAD 9AP32
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)

Rated voltage at Us
Energisation threshold at 40 C
Drop-out voltage at 20 C
Maximum operational voltage
Maximum current at Us
Drop-out current at 20 C
Maximum power dissipated at Us
Supply failure
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
W
ms
c 24
c 19.2
c 2.4
c 30
15
1
0.36
5
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit

Type of contact
Maximum switching voltage
Frequency of the operating current
Maximum current of the contact
V
V
Hz
A
1F
a 250
c 130
50/60
4
ms
10
ms
Hz
Hz
10
0.5
20
Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay

Maximum operating time
at Us (including bounce)
Maximum operating ratet

Mechanical life
Between coil energisation

and closing of the contact
Between coil de-energisation
and opening of the contact
No load
At Ie
Dielectric strength
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage
Maximum current
24 V - DC13
for 500 000 operations
230 V - AC15
V
1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 mn
kV
2.5
V
300
A
0.6
A
0.9
(1) Thermal trip setting range.
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description :
pages 1/194 and 1/195
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/201
Dimensions
Installation system
Dimensions
Mounted assembly, with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors

120
5
2
2
4
255
285
6
(1)
110
135
1 Circuit-breaker and contactor support plate

2 Power connection module
3 Power splitter box
4 Control splitter box
5 Upstream terminal block
6 Outgoing terminal block
(1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.
Mounted assembly with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors (LC1 D40A3 LC1 D65A3)
Vertical mounting
119
3
2
231
138
141
119
9
141
10
55
55
1 Control splitter box

2 Set of GV3 G264 busbars
3 Set of S-shape busbars GV3 S
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/202
Description :
pages 1/192 and1/193
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
schemes
Installation system
Dimensions
Splitter box LU9 G02
Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145

70
56
42
47
75
35
155
35
120
3
10
28,1 (1)
(1) Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the
FRQJXUDWLRQ
Schemes
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1
Control contact
NC
Output common
NC
Contactor status RJ45
NC
Circuit-breaker
status
Input common
X2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LU9 G02
X3
(2)
RJ45
X4
RJ45
RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Control contact
NC
Output common
NC
Contactor status
NC
Circuit-breaker
status
Input common
X5
RJ45
(3)
X7
RJ45
X8
RJ45
1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Grey
6 Pink
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
10 Violet
11 Grey-pink
12 Red-blue
13 White-green
14 Brown-green
15 White-yellow
16 Yellow-brown
17 White-grey
18 Grey-brown
19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown
Not used with

7H6\V4XLFNW
NC
NC
NC
NC
+ c 24 V
- c 24 V
+ c 24 V
- c 24 V
Com
24 V Aux
Inputs
Com
24 V
Outputs
Control X1
Control X2
Control X3
Control X4
Control X5
Control X6
Control X7
Control X8
X10
X6
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ45
Fault X1
Fault X2
Fault X3
Fault X4
Fault X5
Fault X6
Fault X7
Fault X8
Pole status X1
Pole status X2
Pole status X3
Pole status X4
Pole status X5
Pole status X6
Pole status X7
Pole status X8
+ 24 V Aux
- 24 V Aux
+ 24 V Aux
- 24 V Aux
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
X9
Colours of
TSX CDPppp
connection cable
wires (4)
Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
10
(2) 20-way HE10 input connector.

(3) 20-way HE10 output connector.
(4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Schemes :
pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/203
Schemes (continued)
Installation system
Wiring schemes
With relay
13
23
24
Q1
14
LAD9 AP32
23
LAD9 AP31
13
24
14
Q1
21
13
Shunt 1
22
14
N
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(1)
KA2 (2)
Ph
KA1 (2)
Ph
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
KM2
(1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1
Ph
KA1 (2)
22
14
22
14
KM1
(1)
21
KM1
13
13
21
Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.

(1) Contactor coil.
(2) Interface relay.
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
1/204
Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Characteristics :
pages 1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
pages 1/202 and 1/203
Schemes (continued)
Installation system
Wiring schemes (continued)

Without relay
1
13
23
24
Q1
14
23
LAD9 AP3D2
13
LAD9 AP3D1
24
14
Q1
22
(1)
3
KM2
14
(1)
22
KM1
14
KM1
21
13
21
13
21
22
14
13
(1)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1
Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.

(1) Contactor coil.
10
Presentation :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Description :
pages 1/192 and 1/193
Characteristics :
pages1/200 and 1/201
References :
pages 1/196 to 1/199
Dimensions :
1/205
3
5
1
8
10
11
12
6
6
9
8
6
7
13
10
10
1/206
15
12
14
Presentation
Power distribution in control panels

Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5
The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of
products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable.
The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets all these criteria by incorporating
prefabricated components which cater for 3 principal functions:
Carrying of electric current

By the pre-assembled 4-pole busbar system 1, 160 A at 35 C.
4-pole busbar systems can be used for 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm.
An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar
system.
"Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to
connectors 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4.
Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/208.
Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions:
b 2-pole,
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral),
b 4-pole (3-phase + Common).
The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and
electrical connection to the busbars.
2 ratings are available: 16 and 32 A.
The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the
power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit
conditions.
Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply
of power to components.
They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings.
These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar
system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tapoff.
2 types of mounting plate are available:
b single plates 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be
bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm.
b double plates 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9
PRXQWHGRQPP[LQJFHQWUHVHDFKUDLOPD\EHEROWHGRQLQRQHRISRVLWLRQV
allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with
connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices.
Single mounting plates enable the following types of distribution:

b 2-pole (Ph + N) and (Ph + Ph)
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3 Ph + N or 3 Ph + common).
Double mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: 2-pole (Ph + N,
Ph + Ph), 3-pole or 4-pole (3Ph+N and 3Ph + common).
Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable
mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these
extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically.
A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or
double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the
control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm2 max).
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215
10
Mounting possibilities :
pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/207
Characteristics

Busbar system characteristics
IEC 60439
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
UL, CSA, DNV, LROS
Against access to live parts
Flame resistance
2
Number of conductors
IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Conforming to standard UL 94
V0
AK5 JB14p
4
a
Supply current
Rated operational frequency

4
Hz
50 or 60
Ambient temperature 35 C
160
&RHIFLHQW.WREHDSSOLHG
according to the
ambient temperature
35
40
45
50
55
60
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.83
0.78
690
Conforming to UL and CSA
600
Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on
400
480
Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off
690
V
kA
600
25
A 2s
1 x 10 7
Operational voltage
6
Maximum permissible
peak current

Upstream short-circuit (1)
and overload protection
Type of protection
10
Fuses
NS 160 H
NS 160 H
aM
gF
160
160
160
160
Prospective
short-circuit current
kA
36
70
100
100
Operational current
160
160
160
160
Maximum c.s.a.
Minimum c.s.a.
mm2
70
2.5
Solid cable
mm2
70
2.5
Tightening torque
Nm
10
Mounting position
Horizontal or vertical (2)
Prsentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
1/208
Schneider Electric circuit-breaker
Rating
Cabling
850 (incandescent wire)
Fixing with screws provided

(1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA.
(2) Using side stop AK5 BT01 on mounting plates AK5 PA.
Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215
pages 1/210 and 1/211

Tap-off characteristics
Type
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
AK5
PC12
PC12PH
PC13
PC14
PC131
PC32L
PC32LPH PC33
AK5
PC33L
AK5
AK5
PC34
PC331
PC34L
IEC 60439
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
UL, LROS, CSA, DNV
Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 529
Polarity
Phase
Phase
3-phase
3-phase
Phase
Phase
3-phase
3-phase
Neutral
Phase
Neutral
Common
Neutral
Phase
Neutral
Common
2 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
4 x 2.5
3 x 2.5
2x4
2x4
4x4
3x4
Conductor c.s.a.
mm2
3-phase
3 x 2.5
(UL cables)
3-phase
3x4
1 x 1.5
1 x 1.5
3
Conductor colours
Permissible current
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
White
(Neutral)
(Neutral)
16
Black
16
Black
16
16
690 conforming to IEC 60439-1
Rated peak current
kA
A 2s
100 000
16
Black
Black
Blue
Blue
White
(Neutral)
(Neutral)
(Common)
32
32
32
Black
32
Black
32
10
10
(Common)
(Common)
200 000
PVC 105 C
Tap-off characteristics
Type
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3
AK5
PA211PH12
PA211PH13
PA211PH23
PA212PH12
PA212PH13
PA212PH23
AK5
PA231
PA232
PA232S
AK5
PA241
PA242
AK5
PA2311
PA2312
PA2312S
AK5
PA532
AK5
PA542
AK5
PA5312
IEC 60439
3URGXFWFHUWLFDWLRQV
UL, LROS, CSA, DNV
Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Polarity
Phase +
Neutral
Phase +
Phase
3-phase
3-phase
+ Neutral
3-phase
+ Common
3-phase
3-phase
+ Neutral
3-phase
+ Common
Conductor c.s.a.
(UL cables)
mm2
2x4
2x4
3x4
4x4
3x4
1 x 1.5
2 x (3 x 4)
2 x (4 x 4)
2 x (3 x 4)
1 x 1.5
Permissible current
25
25
25
25
25
10
(Common)
50
50
50
10
(Common)

Rated peak current
V
kA
A 2s
690 conforming to IEC 60439-1

6
200 000
PVC 105 C
Characteristics of mounting rails AM1 DL201 and AM1 DL2017

Omega 7 (width 75 mm, depth 15 mm)
Type
Material
2 mm sheet steel
Surface treatment
Galvanized
10
1/209
Mounting
(equipment possibilities)

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
2
Note: if the equipment is wider than the
mounting plate, an extension plate can be
used to increase the width of the support
plate.
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
AK5
AK5
PA231 PA241
PA2311
(1)
AK5
PA212N1
PA212N2
PA212N3
AK5
PA212PH12
PA213PH13
PA212PH23
AK5
AK5
PA232 PA242
PA2312
(1)
AK5
PA232S
PA2312S
(1)
AK5
AK5
PA532 PA542
PA5312
(1)
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
108
108
108
105
105
105
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
No. of 18 mm pitches
Thermal current
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
50 A
50 A
Application
Ph + N
3-pole
3-pole
3-pole
+N
3-pole
3-pole
3-pole
+N
(1) 3-pole + common

Mounting
Width in mm
plate
incorporating
Height in mm
tap-off
Motor starter type
Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay

LS1 D25
170
LS1 D25 + LA8 D254
170
LS1 D25 + LC1 -D09 to D25 and
overload relay up to LR2 D1322 320
LS1 D25 + LC1 D09 to D25
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) +
320
overload relay up to LR2 D1322
Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay

LS1 D25 + LC2 D09 to D18
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) +
LS1 D25 + LC2 D25
with 1 add-on block LA8 D) +
Minimum
centres
with
60 mm
ducting
3-pole Ph + N
Ph + Ph
+N
Number of points used on the busbar system
320
320
170
170
3
5
270
270
6
6
Optimal breaker switch

GK2 CF03 to CF22
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2 AX
GK3 EF40
GK3 EF40 + 4 blocks GK2 AX
Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay

GK2 CF03 to CF21 + LC1 D09
to D18 + overload relay up to
LR2 D1322
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + LC1 D09
to D25 + overload relay up to
LR2 D1322
GK2-AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with
1 block LA8 D + overload relay
up to LR2 D1322
320
320
320
Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay
10

GK2 AX + LC1 D09 to D18
with 1 block LA8 D + overload
relay up to LR2 D1322
GK2 AX + LC2 D25
with 1 block LA8 D + overload
relay up to LR2 D1322
1/210
320
320
Mounting
(equipment possibilities)

(continued)
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note 1: if the equipment is wider than the

mounting plate, an extension plate can be
used to increase the width of the support
plate.
Note 2: for upstream protection, see page
1/208
(1) 3-pole + common
Mounting
Width in mm
plate
Height in mm
incorporating
No. of 18 mm pitches
tap-off
Thermal current
Application
Motor starter type
Minimum
centres with
60 mm
ducting
2
AK5
PA211N1
PA211N2
PA211N3
54
105
3
25 A
Ph + N
AK5
PA231
PA2311
(1)
54
105
3
25 A
3-pole
AK5
AK5
AK5
PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12
PA212N2 PA213PH13
PA212N3 PA212PH23
54
54
54
105
190
190
3
3
3
25 A
25 A
25 A
3-pole Ph + N
Ph + Ph
+N
Number of points used on the busbar system
AK5PA
232
PA2312
(1)
54
190
3
25 A
3-pole
AK5
AK5
PA242 PA232S
PA2312S
(1)
54
108
190
190
4
6
25 A
25 A
3-pole 3-pole
+N
AK
PA532
PA5312
(1)
108
190
6
50 A
3-pole
AK5
PA542
108
190
6
50 A
3-pole
+N
Motor circuit-breaker (type 1 coordination)

GV2p06 to p22
170
GV3M01 to M40
270
4
3
270
270
Motor circuit-breaker + contactor

GV2p06 to p16 + LC1 D09 or
D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270
GV2p06 to p20 + LC1 D09
270
to D18
GV2p06 to p22 + LC1 D09 or
D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270
GV3M01 to M40 with
GV1App + LC1D09 to D32
GV3M01 to M40 + LC1 D09
to D32 with 1 add-on block
LA8 D
Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor

GV2p06 to p20 + LC2-D09 to
D18 with or without add-on
block LA8 D
GV2p22 with 1 add-on block
LA8 D
270
270
C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection

2369p
2370p
2371p and 2372p
170
170
170
10
1/211
References

Busbar systems
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However. if it is to be used in conjunction with
component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1 DL201 rail.
When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 C.
Number of
Number of
Length
Suitable for
Reference
Weight
conductors
tap-offs at
mounting in
18 mm intervals
enclosure width
mm
mm
kg
4 (1)
12
344
600
AK5 JB143
0.700
2
AK5 JB1pp
18
452
800
AK5 JB144
0.900
24
560
800
AK5 JB145
1.100
30
668
800
AK5 JB146
1.300
48
992
1200
AK5 JB149
1.900
54
1100
1200
AK5 JB1410
2.100
Omega rail, width 75 mm

This rail is designed to accommodate the busbar system when it is used with AK5 PA mounting plates incorporating tapoffs. It supportsthe busbar system. The plates simply clip onto the rail.
Material and
surface treatment
2 mm sheet steel
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
mm
2000 (4)
AM1 DL201
Thermal
current
Cable
lengths
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
mm
16
200
6 (2)
AK5 PC12
0.035
32
1000
6 (2)
AK5 PC32L
0.040
16
200
6 (3)
AK5 PC12PH
0.035
32
1000
6 (3)
AK5 PC32LPH
0.040
16
200
AK5 PC13
0.040
32
250
AK5 PC33
0.045
1000
AK5 PC33L
0.060
16
200
AK5 PC14
0.045
32
250
AK5 PC34
0.050
1000
AK5 PC34L
0.065
16
10 (common)
200
AK5 PC131
0.045
32
10 (common)
250
AK5 PC331
0.050
Depth
Length
mm
15
Weight
kg
3.000
Removable power sockets

Use
AK5 PC12
Number of points
used on the
busbar system
Single-phase
+
Neutral
2-phase
3-phase
7
AK5 PC14
3-phase
+
Neutral
3-phase
+
common
AK5 GF1
Weight
kg
Accessories
Maximum no.
C.s.a. mm2
Sold in
Unit
of connections
lots of
reference
20
AK5 GF1
Cable guide
4
2.5 or 4
(1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
(2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2). 2 sockets (N + L3).
(3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3). 2 sockets (L2 + L3).
(4) Cut and drill to suit use.
Description
10
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
1/212
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
Dimensions :
pages 1/210 and 1/211
Weight
kg
0.300

Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

Single plate (height 105 mm)
Use
Single-phase
+ neutral
2-phase
AK5 PA231
No. of 18mm
Phase
points used on the
busbar system
3
Ph1+N
Ph2+N
Ph3+N
Ph1+Ph2
Ph1+Ph3
Ph2+Ph3
3-phase
3
3-phase + common 3
3-phase + neutral 3
Reference
25
Number of 6
rails for component support
1
AK5 PA211N1
kg
0.135
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AK5 PA211N2
AK5 PA211N3
AK5 PA211PH12
AK5 PA211PH13
AK5 PA211PH23
AK5 PA231
AK5 PA2311
AK5 PA241
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.140
0.145
0.145
Thermal
currentA
Weight
Double plate (height 190 mm)
2-phase
3-phase
3
6
Ph1+N
Ph2+N
Ph3+N
Ph1+Ph2
Ph1+Ph3
Ph2+Ph3
3-phase + neutral 3
3-phase + common 3
6
3-phase + neutral
AK5 PA232
6
Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices.
Single-phase
+ neutral
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
50
25
25 (10 common)
25 (10 common)
50 (10 common)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
AK5 PA212N1
AK5 PA212N2
AK5 PA212N3
AK5 PA212PH12
AK5 PA212PH13
AK5 PA212PH23
AK5 PA232
AK5 PA232S
AK5 PA532
AK5 PA242
AK5 PA2312
AK5 PA2312S
AK5 PA5312
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.135
0.230
0.600
0.700
0.230
0.235
0.610
0.710
50
AK5 PA542
0.715
Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the equipment support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider
components.
Use
Number of tap-offs
Reference
Weight
at 18 mm intervals
kg
For mounting
Single
4
AK5 PE17
0.100
plates incorDouble
4
AK5 PE27
0.150
porating tap-off
Side stop (AK5 JB mounted vertically)

Use
For extension plate
AK5 BT01
Sold in
lots of
50
Unit
reference
AK5 BT01
Weight
kg
0.005
Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
10
AK5 SB1
Control terminal blocks

Description
Thermal
current A
10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp
10
10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails
Fixed part
10
10
AB1 DV10235U
10
AB1 DVM10235U
Moving part
10
0.065
Description
Marking
Strips of clip-in markers

10 identical numbers, signs or
capital letters per strip
09
+
AZ
Sold in
lots of
25
25
25
25
Unit
reference
AB1 Rp (1)
AB1 R12
AB1 R13
AB1 Gp (1)
Weight
kg
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
Dimensions :
pages 1/214 and 1/215
10
(1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA.
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
0.047
0.021
Accessories
AK5 SB1
pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/213
Dimensions

Busbar systems
AK5 JBppp
82
30
2
79
45
81
G
a
AK5
No. of
18 mm
points
JB143
JB144
JB145
JB146
JB149
JB1410
344
452
560
668
992
1100
330
438
546
654
978
1086
12
18
24
30
48
54
Busbar feed units

AK5 JBppp
Installation of AK5 JBppp busbar systems

C.s.a. in mm2
min
max
Connection
Flexible cable with or without cable end

1 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
1 x 70 (1)
2 x 35
2 x (9 x 4)
9x4
+
1 x 2.5
9x4
+
1 x 35
Flexible bar
6
Flexible bar
+
H[LEOHFDEOHZLWKRUZLWKRXWFDEOHHQG
7
(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.
Removable power sockets 16 and 32 A
Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A
Single width extension plates
AK5 PC12p. AK5 PC32Lp
AK5 PA2p1. AK5 PA2311. AK5 PA211pppp
AK5 PE17
10
38
35,5
10
10
105
105
17,5
AK5 PCp3. AK5 PC33L

AK5 PCp4. AK5 PC34L
AK5 PCp31
45,5
53 (1)
38
53 (1)
45,5
15
46
54
15 7
Note: It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit.
&DQEH[HGDWPP
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
1/214
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
pages 1/210 and 1/211
71
Dimensions
(continued)
Double extension plate
AK5 PA232. AK5 PA2312. AK5 PA242
AK5 PE27
53 (1)
53 (1)
190
10
100
10
100
190
40
10
15
46
54
15 7
71

AK5 PA232S. AK5 PA2312S
AK5 PA532. AK5 PA5312. AK5 PA542
AK5 BT01
AK5 SB1
20
0,8
Side stop
22
4,2
15,5
10
7
&DQEH[HGDWPP
Presentation :
pages 1/206 and 1/207
Characteristics :
pages 1/208 and 1/209
References :
pages 1/212 and 1/213
pages 1/210 et 1/211
1/215

CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Contents

1 - TeSys motor starters:

b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

Combination automatic motor starters

b D.O.L starters, type 2 coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

Combination starters for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

b 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34

Star-delta starters for motor control

b 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52

b Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64

b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/72

b CANopen communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84

b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96

b Selection curves according to categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/108

b TeSys U starter-controllers, variable speed controllers

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor

Adaptators for use with busbar systems

b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/202

AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system

b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/208

TeSys motor starters

Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.

Current r (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In)

Current Ico (overload I < 10 In)

0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico

Thermal overload relay curve.

Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A)

Current Iq (short-circuit > current r)

(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.

TeSys motor starters

Considerable risks to both persons and

Not authorised by standards:

The most frequently used solution.

This solution ensures reliability of operation.

With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is

TeSys motor starters - open version

Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

D.O.L. or reversing starters with circuit-breaker

D.O.L. starters with

Soft start units or

Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection

1/6 and 1/7

1/8 and 1/9

1/10 and 1/11

Starters for customer assembly

Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

D.O.L. or reversing starters D.O.L., reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers

D.O.L., reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses

Type 1 and type 2 coordination

1/62 and 1/63

1/16 and 1/17, 1/26

1/18 and 1/19,

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:

For customer assembly

TeSys motor starters - open version

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises: